Quarterlytics / Grocery Stores / McColl's Retail Group plc

McColl's Retail Group plc

mcls · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker mcls
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry Grocery Stores
Employees 5001-10,000
← All annual reports
FY2018 Annual Report · McColl's Retail Group plc
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Your
Neighbourhood’s

favourite shop

McColl’s Retail Group plc
Annual Report and Accounts 2018

It’s been an incredibly busy couple of years for McColl’s, 
integrating a major acquisition, launching an extensive 
refresh programme and transitioning to a new wholesale 
supply partner, whilst dealing with unprecedented supply 
chain disruption, which has impacted like-for-like sales 
and profitability. 

However, we have never lost our focus on improving the 
customer experience and providing convenient services to 
local communities. We remain committed to our vision to be 
your neighbourhood’s favourite shop.

McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Revenue*

£1.24bn

+8.1% 2017

Adjusted EBITDA**

£35.0m

-20.5% 2017

Earnings per share

5.9p

-51.7% 2017

Profit before tax

£7.9m

-57.3% 2017

Net debt**

£98.6m

–30.7% 2017

*  To better reflect the core operations of the Group, Post Office 

revenue, previously included in other operating income, is now 
recognised in statutory sales. In order to ensure comparability 2017  
full year revenue, gross margin, gross profit and other operating 
income have been restated. 

** The Group has defined and outlined the purpose of its alternative 

performance measures, including its key measures, in the glossary  
of terms on pages 125–126. Full details of adjusted EBITDA  
can be found in note 6 on page 102.

Strategic report

Chairman’s statement
Where we operate
Market overview

IFC  2018 highlights 
2 
4 
6 
10  What we offer
12  Our business model
14  Chief Executive’s review
22  Our key performance indicators 
23 
27 
34 

Financial review
Social and environmental review
Principal risks and uncertainties

Governance

39  Chairman’s governance statement
39  Compliance with the UK Corporate 

Governance Code
Board of Directors
Retail Board

40 
42 
44  Corporate governance report
48  Nomination Committee report
Audit & Risk Committee report
52 
Directors’ remuneration report
57 
Directors’ remuneration policy
59 
66  Annual report on remuneration
74 
80  Directors’ responsibilities statement

Directors’ report

Financial statements

81 

 Independent Auditor’s report to the 
members of McColl’s Retail Group plc 

91  Consolidated income statement
 Consolidated statement of 
91 
comprehensive income

92  Consolidated statement of financial position
93  Consolidated statement of changes in equity
93  Consolidated statement of cash flows 
Notes to the financial statements
94 
121  Company balance sheet
121  Company statement of changes in equity
122  Notes to the Company financial statements
125  Glossary of terms
IBC  Contacts, addresses and 

shareholder information

2018 highlights

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Continued strategic progress, 
despite supply chain challenges

The start of a new partnership
18 months on from signing our partnership, Morrisons 
has helped us navigate a supply chain crisis and 
established a brand new distribution network to 
supply 1,300 of our stores across the UK.

Read more 
Page 15

An exclusive deal bringing 
Safeway back to the shelves
We have been delighted to bring the Safeway 
brand back to the shelves. Customers love the 
freshness and quality of the products and there 
is a great opportunity to develop the range.

Read more 
Page 16

Showcasing a great fresh offer
In 2018 we embarked on our refresh programme 
following its successful trial. The completely 
refurbished stores showcase our great fresh 
and chilled range, as well as our rapidly growing 
food-to-go offer and are delivering sustained, 
meaningful sales uplifts.

Read more 
Page 19

1

Chairman’s statement

A year of 
transition 

It’s been a challenging year as the McColl’s team 
have navigated their way through unprecedented 
supply chain disruption. Having transitioned 1,300 
of our stores to a new wholesale supply partner, 
the business can now look forward to rebuilding 
momentum and capitalising on the opportunities 
that lie ahead.

“ The team have shown 
enormous strength, 
determination and 
resilience.”

2  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

The business began the 2018 financial year with 
great confidence, having successfully integrated 
a major acquisition and signed a new wholesale 
supply agreement with Morrisons.

However, just days into the new year we 
experienced a significant setback following the sad 
failure of Palmer & Harvey (P&H). The loss of supply 
to 700 stores created major disruption and required 
us to put in place an interim supply solution for nine 
months, during which we accelerated the transition 
of 1,300 stores to Morrisons supply.

Moving to a new wholesale supply partner, at a 
much faster pace than anticipated, created its own 
challenges and severely disrupted our plans for the 
launch of Safeway. We are working with our partner 
Morrisons and remain confident that together we 
can develop an optimal range and promotional 
offer for the future. 

Strong cash performance and new financing 
arrangements provide flexibility
Whilst the considerable supply chain disruption we 
suffered held back like-for-like (LFL) sales and profit, 
the business continues to generate very strong 
cash returns. In the year, we have benefited from 
significant working capital improvements as we’ve 
transitioned to our new wholesale supply partner. 
We have also realised proceeds from the sale and 
leaseback of a number of freeholds we acquired as 
part of our acquisition in 2017. This has allowed us to 
continue to invest in our strategic initiatives that will 
drive future growth, such as new store acquisitions 
and our store refresh programme, as well as pay 
down debt more quickly than anticipated. 

In addition, in the second half of the year we 
engaged with our banking syndicate, and have 
amended our financing arrangements to give us 
more flexibility to execute our business plans.

Dividends
We need to give careful consideration to our cash 
allocation, striking the right balance between 
investing in the business, reducing our debt and 
providing returns to shareholders. 

The Board is recommending a final dividend of 0.6 
pence per share, making a total dividend for the 
period of 4.0 pence, as part of our commitment to 
provide returns to shareholders. This dividend will be 
paid on 6 June 2019, to shareholders on the register 
at the close of business on 26 April 2019, subject 
to approval at the forthcoming Annual General 
Meeting. Our policy of a 50% payout ratio to profit 
after tax (before adjusting gains but after adjusting 
losses) is unchanged.

Strengthening the Executive team
I’m delighted that after a rigorous and extensive 
search, Robbie Bell has recently joined the business 
as Chief Financial Officer. Robbie has over 20 years 
of finance and retail experience, most recently as 
CEO of Welcome Break, and previously in senior 
finance roles at Screwfix, Travelodge and Tesco. 
He is a great addition to the Board and as he settles 
into his new role I am confident that the business will 
benefit from his extensive experience and expertise.

We have made a number of additional senior 
appointments during the year, including Tim Fairs, 
our first Customer Director, and Greg Goodwin 
who joined us in the newly created role of Head 
of Buying. We are committed to bringing in 
commercially focused talent to support the 
business in the future.

I’d also like to thank Simon Fuller for the significant 
contribution he has made during his time as CFO 
at McColl’s. 

Looking forward
Jonathan and the team have shown enormous 
strength, determination and resilience in the face 
of immense challenges, and after an exceptionally 
difficult 2018 we begin 2019 with a more secure 
supply chain.

In the coming year, the business can move forward 
with a renewed focus on customers and the core 
elements of convenience retailing, to rebuild 
confidence and momentum. 

Ensuring a strong balance sheet will be imperative 
and we will maintain good capital discipline, 
exploring opportunities to take further action to 
reduce our debt whilst maintaining appropriate 
levels of investment in the business. 

Whilst it may take longer than anticipated to deliver 
the benefits of the Morrisons partnership this will be 
important to our continued transition to a food-led 
convenience offer. With the distribution network 
firmly established we can continue to enhance 
our offer, through further development of Safeway 
as we realise further value from the relationship. 

Although Brexit and the current political 
environment continues to create uncertainty for 
businesses and consumers, food and grocery 
retail has a history of resilience during economic 
downturn and long-term social and lifestyle trends 
support growth in the convenience channel.

The Board remains committed to our strategy and, 
as we get back on track, we can look forward to 
a brighter future.

Angus Porter
Chairman

3

Where we operate

Serving communities 
across the UK

Through our network of convenience stores 
and newsagents we provide essential 
groceries and neighbourhood services to 
1,556 local communities across the UK.

2011

47%

Convenience

2018

 81%

Convenience

5
8
8

1,263

stores 

5
7
6

3

0

3

1,556

stores

1

,

2

5

3 

Convenience stores 

Newsagents

4  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Scotland

174 37

1,556

Total stores

North 
West

216 30

North 
East

71

9

Yorkshire  
and Humber

122 14

East 
Midlands

73 16

West 
Midlands

60 30

East 
of England

121 73

Wales

48

5

South 
East

London

13 10

188 55

South West

167 24

Number of stores

0 – 100  

101 – 200  

200+

Convenience stores  

Newsagents

 
 
Convenience stores

Newsagents

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Convenience stores
McColl’s has a long and rich history and we 
can trace our roots back to 1901 when the 
first RS McColl opened. In 1994, the strategy to 
convert to convenience was launched and the 
Group’s first food-based stores were opened. 
Since then we have grown through acquiring 
new convenience stores as well as converting 
our newsagents. 

Today, we are a leading neighbourhood retailer 
with 1,253 convenience stores across the UK.

Refreshed stores 2018
Since our early pilots at 
the end of 2016 we have 
completely refitted 86 of  
our convenience stores as 
part of Project Refresh, and 
these stores are delivering 
good, sustainable sales 
uplifts. We believe there  
are another c.400 stores 
that could benefit 
from this treatment.

4

0

0

8

6

Newsagents
Our newsagents are an established part 
of the business and they have provided a 
valuable foundation for our continued growth 
in convenience through our programme 
of conversions. 

Our newsagents are branded Martin’s across 
the UK, except in Scotland where we operate 
under our heritage brand, RS McColl.

 1,253

Convenience stores

59in 2018

303Newsagents

5

Market overview

Macro conditions

Economic outlook 
For 2018 as a whole, UK GDP growth slipped to its lowest since 
2012, and slowed in the final quarter as all three drivers – 
services, production and construction, shrank during December. 

Although it remains difficult to predict how the UK economy will 
perform in the months ahead, assuming the planned exit from 
the European Union takes place smoothly, growth is expected to 
remain modest, reflecting the drag on business investment from 
ongoing economic and political uncertainty. However, higher 
government spending and short-term tax cuts announced in 
the 2018 Autumn budget should provide some boost to growth 
in 2019.

Source: Office for National Statistics, PwC UK Economic Outlook, November 2018.

GDP growth

3

2

1

2016

2017

2018(F) 

2019(F)

Source: ONS for 2016-17, PwC main scenario for 2018-19

Food prices top personal  
economic concerns
Over the course of 2018 consumer confidence has 
been subdued and towards the end of the year 
fell, despite the easing of inflationary pressures, as 
consumers worried about the economic outlook for 
the next 12 months amidst uncertainty around Brexit.

Only 20% of consumers expect to be better off 
financially in the year ahead and the top personal 
economic concern for shoppers is food prices with 
80% of shoppers expecting food and grocery prices 
to increase over this time period.

Shoppers’ top personal economic concerns  
for the year ahead

Food prices

Energy bills

Petrol prices

No wage increase

Interest rates

46%

33%

26%

Tax and benefit changes
20%

Change in personal circumstance

19%

Job insecurity

13%

House prices

11%

None of these

7%

Other

4%

Don’t know
4%

64%

56%

Brexit
The planned exit from the European Union (EU) 
creates some risks and uncertainties for many UK 
businesses, including grocery retailers. 

It is estimated that around a third of the food we eat 
in the UK is sourced from the EU. In the event of a 
no-deal Brexit import tariffs could be higher, increasing 
the cost of goods, and import delays could mean 
short shelf life products expire before they can reach 
their destination. A number of grocery retailers, 
including Morrisons and the Co-op have applied for 
‘approved economic operator status’, which means 
that goods will be fast tracked through customs, 
reducing the risk with their non UK suppliers.

The sector could also be impacted by a potential 
shortage of low skilled workers if a restriction on 
free movement is imposed following Brexit.

As the scheduled date for leaving the EU approaches 
consumer spending has been restrained, and 
until there is greater clarity on the exit process 
it is difficult to predict the impact on retailers. 

Read more about how McColl’s is mitigating risks 
associated with Brexit Page 38

6  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Source: IGD Shopper Vista 2018, KPMG-BRC Retail Sales Monitor 
Dec 2018.

However, the grocery sector has a proven record 
of withstanding economic downturn and in recent 
periods of uncertainty consumers have tended 
to manage their budgets by shopping little and 
often, locally. Therefore, the convenience channel 
in particular can benefit from, broader negative 
economic trends.

Source: The British Retail Consortium (BRC).

Competition in the grocery sector 
remains intense
The grocery sector remains intensely competitive 
and 2018 has been another year of significant 
change as businesses look to gain strength 
and scale through acquisitions, mergers and 
partnerships, including the proposed merger 
of the second and third largest retailers in 
the sector.

Although the hot summer and the World Cup 
provided a boost, towards the end of the year 
sales have slowed across the sector, and price 
competition between retailers has driven a 
slowdown in food inflation despite increasing 
input prices.

One of the main drivers of competition is that 
shoppers continue to use a range of channels for 
their grocery shopping. On average they use four 
to five channels per month, with nearly all shoppers 
visiting a supermarket or hypermarket, and nine out 
of ten visiting a convenience store. Shoppers are 
also increasingly combining channels with 76% 
using four or more channels in the last four weeks, 
and half of shoppers having visited a large store, 
convenience store, food discount store and variety 
discounter in the last four weeks.

Despite a recent slowdown growth is forecast across 
all the major grocery channels over the next five 
years, with online and discount set to account for 
over half of the increase in market value to 2023.

Source: IGD Shopper Vista 2018, IGD Channel Forecasts June 2018.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Convenience trends

Solid growth in  
convenience continues 
Long-term lifestyle and societal trends continue 
to impact the way we shop with more people 
choosing to shop little and often, locally. 
For example, longer life expectancy, more single 
person households, lengthy commutes and 
a greater emphasis on leisure time all support 
convenience shopping and it has been one of 
the fastest growing channels in the UK grocery 
market over the last five years.

Over the next five years, the Institute of Grocery 
Distribution (IGD) are expecting this trend to 
continue and are forecasting solid growth in 
convenience, with the channel adding a further 
£7.1bn in value in the next five years, representing 
a compound annual uplift of 3.3%.

£218.5bn

£190.3bn

2023

2018

2023

2018

2023

2018

£47.2bn

£40.1bn

£31.5bn

£23.1bn

2023

£16.7bn

2018

£16.4bn

2023

£17.3bn

2018

£11.4bn

2023

£9.9bn

2018

£10.2bn

Supermarkets

Discounters 

Online

Opportunities to consolidate  
a highly fragmented channel 
The convenience channel remains highly 
fragmented and around three-quarters of the 
c.46,000 UK stores are independently owned. 
The number of stores has been fairly static in recent 
years with fewer opportunities for new greenfield 
and brownfield sites. However, there remains plenty 
of opportunity for consolidation, particularly for 
retailers with a flexible operating model.

ti v e s 28% 72%

10%

7%

e r a

p

6%

17%

ains and c o- o
ltiple c

h

10%

u
M

2%

29%

36%

31%

e sses

u sin

S m a ll  b

  Unaffiliated independents

  Co-operatives

   Symbol groups 

   Forecourts 

  — Independents 
  — Multiples

  — Multiples 
  — Independents

Convenience

Hypermarkets

Other retailers

  Multiples

Source: IGD Channel Forecast June 2018.

Source: IGD Research, Wm Reed Business Media, Experian Catalist.

7

 
 
 
Market overview continued

The top-up shopping mission 
remains popular, and shoppers  
value convenience
The traditional top-up shop is still the leading 
driver of convenience store visits and it accounts 
for around half of all shopping missions. 

Two key product categories for top-up shopping 
are chilled foods and alcohol, and together these 
contribute over 28% of total convenience store sales.

Whilst it is in long-term decline, the newsagent 
mission remains important with one in five shoppers 
claiming to have last visited a convenience store 
for tobacco, news or lottery. Within this, tobacco 
remains the largest single product area, with its 
value supported by ongoing manufacturer price 
rises and duty increases, despite falling volumes.

Food-to-go and evening meal solutions are growing 
categories as these are two time-saving missions 
that are very popular with younger customers.

Shoppers are prepared to pay more to shop in 
convenience stores and 40% say they shop at their 
nearest store even though it is more expensive. 
This rises to over 50% for post millennials born 
between 1992 and 1999. 

However, the premium shoppers are prepared 
to pay for convenience has somewhat reduced in 
the last four years, with customers expecting to pay 
on average 10% more than in a larger store versus 
14% more in 2014.

Source: IGD Shopper Vista 2018, HIM! Convenience Tracking 
Programme 2018.

8  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Shopping missions claimed to be conducted on 
shoppers’ last convenience store visit

Food-to-go

Top-up shop

Tobacco/ 
news/lottery

Evening 
meal

Source: IGD Shopper Vista 2018. Scale of 
circles indicates proportion of shopping 
missions conducted.

Non-food

Main  
shop

Saving time is a priority and 
choice is becoming increasingly 
important
The reasons for visiting a convenience store can 
significantly differ by shopper type, with older 
shoppers favouring their convenient location 
and younger shoppers choosing to shop in 
convenience stores because it’s quicker and 
easier in store.

There has also been a significant increase in 
shoppers choosing convenience stores for the 
good choice of products as retailers continue to 
expand, develop and define their ranges in small 
stores. Almost a quarter of shoppers now claim this 
is their reason for shopping in a convenience store 
compared to less than 20% 12 months ago.

79%

51%

It is a convenient location

It was quicker/easier

It has good quality products

23%

It has good choice/availability 

23%

It helps me to save money

9%

It’s more enjoyable
8%

Source: IGD Shopper Vista 2018.

What our customers like

“ I feel like a 
somebody  
in McColl’s.”

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

“ You’ve got good 

staff and that 
makes all the 

difference.”

“ I think the 

Safeway range is 
just as good as a 

supermarket.”

9

What we offer

Our vision is to be 
your neighbourhood’s 
favourite shop

Every community is different and with our flexible 
model we tailor our offer to meet the needs of local 
neighbourhoods, offering a wide range of groceries, 
everyday essentials, and useful services. 

o c a l 

L

E

v

e

s

e

r

r

y

s  

t
c
u
d
o

r

P

v
i

d

c

a

e

y

s

s

m unitie

Customer  
needs

C

ustomer  
focus

m

C o

See our business model
Page 12

10  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Customer focus

Local

Our warm and friendly colleagues provide  
excellent customer service and are a driving  
force in our journey to becoming your 
neighbourhood’s favourite shop.

Being at the heart of neighbourhoods, 
with long opening hours, means we’re a 
convenient choice for lots of our customers. 

1/3 

Around a third of our 
customers visit us 
every dayday

58%

of customers live or work 
within 400m of their 
local McColl’s

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Products

With essential food and groceries, fresh fruit 
and vegetables, ready meals and freshly 
prepared food-to-go, we cater for a wide 
variety of customer needs and missions. 
The new Safeway range offers quality food 
at a price that makes it easier to eat well.

Everyday services

Communities

We think of ourselves as a neighbourhood  
hub – providing great products and useful  
services, close to where people live, and  
available when they need them.

We know just how important it is to support 
communities around our stores. We’ve been 
able to help hundreds of local organisations 
and good causes through the ‘Making a 
Difference Locally’ programme.

12%

year-on-year increase in fresh, 
chilled and frozen food sales

591

Post Offices

500+

local organisations 
and good causes 
supported

11

Our business model

Our vision is to become your 
neighbourhood’s favourite shop 
through our strategy focused on 
increasing our neighbourhood 
presence, growing our 
convenience offer and providing 
excellent customer service.

The resources and 
relationships we need

How we manage 
our supply chain

Colleagues
Our colleagues are our most important asset and a key driver 
in our vision to become your neighbourhood’s favourite shop.

Stores
We operate 1,556 stores across the UK comprising of 1,253 
convenience stores and 303 newsagents. We directly manage all 
of our stores which means we can ensure strong retail standards.

by

We have a long-term partnership with 
Morrisons. They supply c.1,300 of our 
convenience stores and newsagents with 
a range of branded products as well as a 
best in class ‘own label’ range of fresh food 
and groceries through the Safeway brand.

Our business model is underpinned  
by our core values:

Partners & suppliers
Our ability to run our stores efficiently relies on  
a strong relationship with our supply partners.

We buy from wholesale distributors which means  
we do not have the investment and working  
capital costs associated with a distribution  
network. It gives us greater flexibility and  
allows us to focus on our retail operations.1

Customer  
first

Simple and 
consistent

Caring and 
compassionate

Community 
champions

1 

In addition, a number of non-grocery categories are delivered directly by 
specialist suppliers, including news & magazines, and greetings cards.

2  HIM! Convenience Tracking Programme 2018.

3  See glossary of terms on page 125 for definition

12  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018
12  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Brand & reputation
The McColl’s name has been around for over 100 years. 
Our brand and reputation are important to us and as the 
business evolves we are helping customers understand 
what they can expect from McColl’s.

IT
The information systems we have in place are crucial to 
the smooth running and efficiency of our business, and we 
continue to invest to ensure our systems are fit for purpose.

Robust financials
We need a resilient balance sheet to invest in our strategic plans.

Nisa supply the c.300 convenience stores 
that we acquired in 2017. These stores will 
transition to Morrisons supply over time.

What makes us a leading neighbourhood retailer

The value this creates

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

58%

of our customers  
live within 400m  
of our stores

o c a l
t h e   h e a r t  
g   a t
o u r h o o d s  means  
n v e n i e n t choice  
b
  c u s tomers.
f   o u r

o

B

L
e i n
e i g
o f n
e ’r e   a   c
fo r l o t s  o
w

h

Customer  
first

c.350

Safeway  
products

30%

of our customers  
visit our stores  
every day

ns.

s, fresh 
als 
o, 
riety of 
-to-g
e
y m
d missio

d
o
o
f
d
e
a
p
e

r

a
v
e
d
w
a

i

r

r

p

o

f

n
a
s
d
e
e
n

rie
e
c
o
r
g
d
n
a
d
o
o

d
a
e
r
,
s
e
b
a

l

t

e
g
e
v

f

l

a

y

l

r

e

h

t

r

e

m

d

s

a

e

n

s

a

e

c

r

f

o

t

s

e

u

s

d

e

t

i

u

w

c

n

s
t
c
u
d
o

r

P

i

t

n

c.3k

products in  
a convenience  
store 

h

t
i

r

f

a

W

c

c

O

o

lle

ur w

f

u

C

s
t
o

o

m

e

n

a

h

b

g

o

u

r
c

eig

 in o

arm and friend l y  
es provide excell e n t
er service and are a dr i v i n g  
ur journey to becoming  y o u r
urhood’s favourite shop.
ustomer focus

9.3

On average customers rate 
us 9.3 out of 10 for colleague 
friendliness/helpfulness2

7 days

Our stores are open  
seven days a week

847

Collect+ points and 
Amazon lockers

1,097

r

y

Eve
k of o
vid
i

We thin
hub – pro
useful s

e

u

p

o

n

w

h

e

ple

e
r
vi
 liv

rs

a

e

l

v

y

g

e

s

c

g

a

s

n t

h

e

s
,

e

, 

e

a

y

r

e

s

e

a

t

c

l

a

n

r

d

ATMs

591

Post Offices

No1

2018 Scottish 
Grocer Awards 
community 
retailer of  
the year

n

o

p

e

v

n

d

s

r

i

e

e

o

g

i

e

t

a

d

h

d

v

o

u

b

c

t

h

a

i

l

w

a

h

c

o

t

s

u

r

e
m

.

b

e

l

e

r

e

a
n
d

h
o
o
d

e

s

w m

h
c
u

p
o
h

s
 i

s

t it
g a s
n
orta
nitie
u
m

s

o

o

p
m

p le v alue havin
w just h
m unitie
aro und our stores. 
y a n d how im
t o  s u p p ort co
o
C

a r b

m

W e  k n
o
p e
e

n

500+

local organisations 
and good causes 
supported

Customers
We provide access to essential services, 
fresh food and grocery products for 
millions of people.

5m

customers  
every week

Colleagues
We are committed to looking after our 
colleagues so that they can look after  
our customers.

>90%

enjoy working  
for McColl’s

Social
Our stores are run by local people for local 
people which gives us a strong sense 
of community. We support a wide range 
of local organisations and good causes.

500+

local organisations

Economic
We are investing for long-term growth, 
which helps both our suppliers and the 
overall UK economy prosper.

£25.3m

gross capital 
expenditure3 

Shareholder returns
We are committed to delivering value to 
shareholders and sharing in our success 
through dividends.

4.0p

full year dividend

Margins
In the longer term a strengthening mix 
in our sales will drive improvement in our 
gross margin as we become less reliant 
on low margin traditional categories.

26.0%

gross margin

Strong cash generation
We are a cash generative business that 
enables us to manage our debt and invest 
in our strategic plans. In 2019 net cash was 
supported by proceeds from sale and 
leaseback transactions and working  
capital improvements.

£61.8m

Net cash from  
operating activities

13

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Chief Executive’s review

Getting back 
on track

In approaching 30 years in the business I have 
never known a year as challenging as 2018. 
However, I couldn’t be prouder of the McColl’s 
team and how we have all pulled together in the 
midst of unprecedented supply chain disruption. 
We move into 2019 with a more stable and secure 
distribution network, and we remain a profitable, 
cash generative business. As we work to get back 
on track there are plenty of opportunities to grow.

We began the new financial year with the business 
in great shape. We had just surpassed the milestone 
of £1bn of annual revenues, with an improving 
sales trend and a strengthening product mix and 
margin. We were also excited to begin working with 
our new wholesale partner, Morrisons, and were 
making preparations for the launch of Safeway. 
However, just 48 hours into the year we received 
the sad news that P&H, the wholesale supplier to 
700 of our convenience stores and newsagents, 
had entered into administration and deliveries 
would cease immediately.

In those early weeks, in the build-up to the 
busy festive period, we experienced significant 
availability issues as we established an interim 
supply solution with the help of our existing 
wholesale supply partner, Nisa, and our new 
partner, Morrisons. We are extremely grateful 
to both of them for their support.

14  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

A fresh

partnership

1,300

Stores supplied

Morrisons began supplying our stores with 
a range of branded products, as well as a 
best in class ‘own label’ range of fresh food 
and groceries through the Safeway brand, 
in January 2018. The phased rollout was 
accelerated following the collapse of P&H 
and the transition of 1,300 stores completed in 
August 2018, three months ahead of schedule.

15

Chief Executive’s review continued

Renowned for British

quality

and value

Safeway is known for offering good value on 
everything from milk and juice to British meat and 
vegetables. We’re committed to serving up quality 
food at a price that makes it easier to eat well. 
With a new range of around 350 Safeway products 
including convenience store essentials from a 
name they can trust, our customers can enjoy great 
tasting food and drink – knowing that they are 
getting freshness and quality at their convenience.

350

Safeway  
products

16  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Whilst we were able to largely ensure continuity 
of supply within a number of weeks, the interim 
solution was complex and more costly. It also 
diverted management focus from some of our 
wider strategic initiatives as we prioritised securing 
the supply chain.

Morrisons enabled us to re-establish tobacco supply 
within a week and agreed to accelerate the planned 
transition of 1,300 stores in 2018. This completed in 
August, three months ahead of schedule.

Setting up a national distribution network from 
scratch was an enormous undertaking and 
accelerating this process understandably created 
some operational issues which have impacted 
availability. This is improving week by week and we 
expect these issues to further improve as we move 
through 2019.

Prioritising the transition has also set back some of our 
wider plans including range development, and 
improving some of our cost prices. We are working 
together to develop an optimal range 
and promotional programme for our customers. 

In the year, these supply chain impacts, in addition 
to the dilutive effect of a robust performance on 
tobacco, have weighed down on our gross margin, 
which has declined by 0.8%.

However, given the challenges we have faced, 
we scaled back our programme, acquiring 11 new 
convenience stores during the year, and we expect 
to complete a small number in 2019.

Increasing our presence is also about fostering 
strong links with the communities we serve. 
Our neighbourhood locations and local colleague 
base provides us with regular opportunities to 
connect with customers. 

Increase neighbourhood presence
Following the major acquisition of 298 convenience 
stores in 2017, we resumed our single store 
acquisition programme. There is no shortage 
of opportunities, with around three-quarters of 
the UK’s 46,000 convenience stores remaining 
independently owned. 

In the last five years we have supported well over 
500 local good causes, including scout groups, 
schools, hospitals and local charities. All of these 
have been chosen by colleagues and customers 
in our stores.

Vision

Goals

Key building 
blocks

Values

Your  
neighbourhood’s 
favourite shop

1.
Growing 
convenience 
offer

2.
Excellent 
customer 
service

3.
Increase 
neighbourhood 
presence

Brand

Offer

Customer

Stores

Colleagues

Customer
first

Simple and
consistent

Caring and 
compassionate

Community
champions

1

2

Growing convenience offer 
Working with our carefully selected supply 
partners we offer an ever-greater range of 
products and services to meet the evolving 
needs of neighbourhoods across the UK.

Excellent customer service 
Understanding customers and doing 
everything that we can to meet their 
everyday needs is at our core. We strive 
to build loyalty and strengthen our 
reputation in the neighbourhoods we serve, 
by providing a warm and friendly welcome 
along with a host of services that make the 
lives of our customers easier.

3

Increase neighbourhood presence 
We will grow our neighbourhood 
presence by strengthening our brand 
and acquiring new stores. We will continue 
to play an important role in supporting the 
communities we serve.

17

Chief Executive’s review continued

We have seen good growth in our average 
basket size which was up by 37p to £5.99. This was 
supported by the EUTPD2 regulations, introduced 
in May 2017, banning the sale of smaller packs of 
tobacco, and by growth in top-up shopping as we 
have grown grocery sales.

Food-to-go remains a small but growing category 
with lots of potential, as more meals are eaten 
outside of the home. We’ve extended our offer 
during the year and now have approaching 400 
stores with a hot food-to-go offer and around 600 
with a coffee unit. We now have 23 Subways trading, 
including the first of the new fresh forward concept.

Our store refresh programme presents a tremendous 
opportunity to grow our convenience offer and 
unlock the value inherent in our existing estate. 
During the year, we completed 59 refreshes, 
redesigning the store layout to provide more 
refrigerated space for chilled foods and new 

In addition, the recent launch of our social media 
channels (Facebook, Twitter and Instagram) 
is giving us new ways to engage with customers 
and get valuable feedback. 

Growing convenience offer
We have taken an important step in growing our 
convenience offer with the launch of Safeway. 
The range of around 350 fresh, chilled and ambient 
groceries, and household products is now available 
in the majority of our stores and over time it will roll 
out to the entire estate. We are delighted with the 
quality of the products and customer feedback so 
far has been excellent. 

We have seen good growth in a number of 
categories following the launch, including fresh 
meat and fruit and vegetables, but this has 
been offset to some extent by deflation as we’ve 
introduced lower price points on popular lines, 
such as eggs, microwave rice and soft drinks.

The accelerated transition to Morrisons supply led 
to a more rapid launch of Safeway than we had 
originally planned and constrained our ability to fully 
establish and promote the new range. As a result of 
this, and some challenges with availability, we have 
yet to see the meaningful increase in overall store 
performance that we would ultimately expect.

Despite this we have made progress towards our 
strategic target for grocery and alcohol to be our 
biggest sales category. It now represents over a third 
of our sales, and as we develop the Safeway range 
over the coming months we expect this to increase 
further. We are also commencing a full range review 
process, to respond to customer trends and get 
the most out of our newly established supply chain.

1  HIM! Convenience Tracking Programme 2018.

18  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

food-to-go fixtures. These stores support a broader 
range of convenience products and we are seeing 
sustained sales uplifts of over 5%. In 2019, we plan to 
continue with our refresh programme and expect 
to complete a further 20–30 stores.

Excellent customer service
Our biggest strength has always been our warm 
and friendly colleagues and this year has been no 
different. We continue to score very highly in terms 
of colleague friendliness and helpfulness, and their 
dedication and hard work has meant that in a 
recent survey we have improved on every single 
customer metric, despite the challenges of the last 
12 months.1

A great shopping trip at McColl’s also involves 
access to a range of useful neighbourhood services. 
It is a growing part of our offer and customers 
are twice as likely to visit our stores for this reason. 
We now have around 850 internet collection and 
return points and we’ve cemented our position 
as the UK’s largest operator of Post Offices. We’ve 
opened over 25 in the year and plan to open 
another 20 in the year ahead.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Continued

investment

59

Stores refreshed  
in 2018

We began our refresh programme in 2016 
with our first pilot stores. Our refresh stores, 
are completely redesigned around shopping 
missions with more space dedicated to fresh 
and chilled foods and a greater focus on 
food-to-go. We’ve now completed 86 stores 
and they are delivering sustained sales uplifts 
of over 5%.

19

Chief Executive’s review continued

Post Office Retailer of the Year
McColl’s Queensway Worle in Weston-super-Mare was awarded Post Office 
Retailer of the Year at the Retail Industry Awards 2018.

The Post Office is an important partner to McColl’s, attracting over 600,000 
visits to our stores every week. We know that it is the service that has the 
most positive impact on a local area1 and we’re proud to be the UK’s largest 
Post Office partner with around 600 branches.

1  Association of Convenience Stores (ACS) Local Shop Report 2018.

20  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Whilst our existing financing is in place until mid-2021, 
to ensure that we maintain flexibility to execute our 
strategic plans, last summer we initiated discussions 
with our banking syndicate and a number of 
improvements have been made to the terms.

Looking ahead
Over the coming months the grocery sector will 
remain intensely competitive as we experience 
ongoing political and economic uncertainty 
making consumers cautious about spending. 
We will need to ensure that we manage cost 
pressures and maintain competitive retail 
pricing. But as we work through the issues we’ve 
experienced in 2018 there are exciting opportunities 
ahead. We remain confident in our strategy and 
will continue to enhance our convenience offer, 
through developing the Safeway range; increase 
our neighbourhood presence through stronger 
engagement with our communities; and continue 
to provide excellent customer service by focusing 
on the core elements of convenience retailing. 

Finally, I would like to take this opportunity to thank 
all of my colleagues at McColl’s for their continued 
hard work and commitment.

Jonathan Miller
Chief Executive

Following the completion of the transition of 1,300 
stores to our new wholesale partner we are now 
refocusing on the core elements of neighbourhood 
retailing and prioritising what is most important to 
our customers. We have launched our Customer 
Champions – four characters that represent our four 
priorities – making sure all customers get a warm 
greeting, that our shelves are well stocked, that we 
highlight great offers and promotions, and that the 
shopping trip is quick and easy. 

Driving efficiency and maintaining 
financial flexibility
Like all retail businesses, we have had to manage 
cost pressures during the year, the increase in the 
National Living Wage being the most significant. 
We remain focused on driving in-store efficiency 
and have made a number of improvements during 
the year, including the introduction of automated 
bake plans for hot food-to-go. We are also exploring 
new technological solutions. For example, we have 
recently introduced biometric scanners that monitor 
colleague time and attendance to ensure we can 
more accurately manage our payroll. 

Cost pressures are expected to intensify in 2019, 
with a further increase in wage rates, energy 
inflation and an increase in our annual rent 
following our sale and leaseback activity. In light 
of this we continue to review our estate, assessing 
how future cost increases impact profit forecasts. 
During the year, we have closed or sold a number 
of underperforming stores and we expect to make 
further disposals in the year ahead.

We have completed a number of sale and 
leaseback deals on the freeholds we acquired as 
part of the major acquisition in 2017. The proceeds 
from these sales have helped to fund a number 
of strategic projects, including the store refresh 
programme and pay down debt to a significantly 
lower level than anticipated.

Q&A with the Chief Executive

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

“ As I reflect on  
the last 12 months  
I am reassured by 
the resilience of 
the business.”

Did the failure of P&H  
take you by surprise?

Q  
A We were aware that P&H was vulnerable.  

It’s one of the reasons we had re-tendered 
our wholesale supply contract earlier that 

year. What was a surprise was the speed with which 
they entered into administration and deliveries ceased. 
We were fortunate to have the support of Nisa and 
Morrisons which enabled us to move quickly to 
implement an interim supply solution.

Is it risky to move to one wholesale supply partner 
for the whole estate? What happens if they fail? 

Q  
A Working with a FTSE 100 grocery retailer with 

a strong balance sheet gives us more security 
than we’ve had before. However, we’re not 

complacent and have developed contingency plans  
in the event that there is an issue with supply.

When do you think you will recover  
from the setbacks of the last year?

Q  
A We expect to see LFL sales improvement during 

the year and a modest improvement in profit. 
As we resolve the issues we’ve experienced as a 
result of the rapid rollout to Morrisons supply and develop 
the Safeway range we expect to build momentum back 
into the business and see further improvement.

How do you plan to make  
Safeway a success?

Q  
A We’ve not yet been able to fully get behind  

the Safeway launch or develop the range  
as we’d planned. But we’re getting on with  
it now – for example, there are some key categories  
that aren’t currently in the range that we hope to be  
able to launch soon.

How are you feeling after such  
a difficult year?

Q  
A It’s been without doubt the most challenging 

year I’ve experienced in almost 30 years in the 
business. I’m feeling incredibly proud of how hard 

the team have worked and relieved that the disruption is 
behind us. There are still headwinds – we face significant 
cost pressures that are not expected to abate any time 
soon and these are clearly uncertain times for consumers 
and the UK economy. But as I reflect on the last 12 months 
I am reassured by the resilience of the business. Despite a 
major supplier failure we have remained cash generative 
and profitable and I am positive about the future. 

21

Our key performance indicators

Progress in 2018

In 2018, despite the challenges 
we faced we made progress 
against a number of our key 
performance indicators (KPIs).

We use six KPIs to monitor the performance 
of the business. 

We keep KPIs under review to ensure they 
remain appropriate and help determine 
remuneration policy. 

Successfully delivering against our three 
strategic goals drives improvements in  
our KPIs.

1. Growing convenience offer

2. Excellent customer service

3. Increase neighbourhood presence

1  To better reflect the core operations of the Group, Post Office 

revenue, previously included in other operating income, is now 
recognised in statutory sales. In order to ensure comparability 2017 
full year revenue, gross margin, gross profit and other operating 
income have been restated. Details of the restatements can be 
found in note 4 on page 101. 

2  The Group has defined and outlined the purpose of its alternative 
performance measures, including its key measures, in the glossary 
of terms on pages 125–126.

3  Full details of adjusted EBITDA can be found in note 6 on page 102.

22  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Revenue1

£1.24bn

+8.1% 2017

Like-for-like sales2

-1.4%

 2017: +0.1%

Adjusted EBITDA2, 3 

£35.0m

-20.5% 2017

2018

2017

2016

£1.24bn

-1.4%

£1.15bn

£0.97bn

-1.9%

2018

2017

2016

+0.1%

2018

2017

2016

£35.0m

£44.0m

£36.7m

Total revenue grew by 8.1%, principally 
driven by the annualisation of the major 
acquisition in 2017.

Like-for-like sales (LFL) decreased 
by 1.4%, impacted by supply chain 
disruption and availability issues.

Adjusted EBITDA was down £9.0m 
year-on-year, driven by the adoption of 
temporary supply terms and accelerated 
transition to Morrisons supply.

Adjusted earnings per share2

6.7p

-63.5% 2017

Average basket size

£5.99

+6.6% 2017

Grocery and alcohol sales2

28%

34%

6.7 pence

2018

2017

2016

18.3 pence

16.0 pence

2018

2017

2016

£5.99

£5.62

£5.24

Adjusted earnings per share 
decreased to 6.7 pence.

We have seen continued growth 
in our average basket size as we 
develop our convenience offer and 
increase the proportion of top-up 
shopping missions at McColl’s.

38%

We have seen growth in grocery 
and alcohol sales and they now 
account for 34% of our total 
sales compared to 32% in 2017.

  Grocery and alcohol

  Cigarettes and tobacco

  Impulse, news and other

Financial review

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

A focus on strong 
capital discipline

Annual revenue growth supported by 2017 
major acquisition
Full year revenue grew to £1.24bn (2017: £1.15bn1), 
an increase of 8.1%. This year-on-year growth 
was driven by the major acquisition we completed 
in 2017 which has added around 30% to our 
total sales. 

Like-for-like (LFL) sales performance was impacted 
throughout the year by the supply chain disruption 
we experienced following the collapse of P&H 
and continued operational challenges as we 
established our new partnership with Morrisons. 
Full year LFL sales were down 1.4%, but improved 
during the year, with sales in the final quarter being 
broadly flat. 

Across the industry tobacco continues to face 
long-term structural decline. However, it currently 
remains our largest category and we saw strong 
sales growth during the year. It was the most resilient 
part of our supply chain and sales were supported 
by significant inflation as a result of manufacturer 
and duty increases. Sales in our other traditional 
categories, principally news and confectionery, 
continue to decline as expected.

We have, however, seen good overall growth in 
a number of key grocery categories, including 
fresh food, bringing us closer to our strategic target 
for grocery and alcohol to be our largest sales 
category. It now represents 34% of our total sales, 
an improvement of two percentage points year-
on-year, and from 27% before the major acquisition 
in 2017.

Gross profit margin impacted  
by supply chain challenges
With the evolution of our sales mix towards higher 
margin products we would typically expect 
to see an improvement in gross profit margins. 
However, adjusted gross margin has declined 
by 0.8% year-on-year to 26.0% (2017: 26.8%1, 
2018 gross margin 25.9%). This is partly a result of 
the adoption of temporary supply terms as we 
implemented an interim distribution solution and 
a robust performance on tobacco, which is a low 
margin category.

In addition, as Morrisons established its wholesale 
operation this has initially resulted in some 
higher than anticipated cost prices on certain 
convenience lines. These are expected to improve 
during 2019 as we leverage and benefit from our 
joint buying capabilities and our partnerships 
with suppliers.

In terms of overall value, total gross profit grew 
by 4.5% to £321.1m (2017: £307.4m1), benefiting 
from the contribution of stores acquired in 2017. 
Within gross profit, partly offsetting the decline is 
supplier income relating to both the wind down 
of a legacy contract and the transition to our new 
wholesale partner (recognised over the ongoing 
life of the contract).

23

Our financial performance in 2018 was inevitably 
impacted by the unprecedented disruption the 
business faced following the failure of a major 
supplier and the transition to a new wholesale 
supply partner. I am delighted to have joined the 
McColl’s Board at this crucial time for the business. 
As we begin to recover from a difficult period we 
are focused on strong capital discipline and careful 
cost management to enable the business to rebuild 
momentum and return to sustainable value creation.

1  To better reflect the core operations of the Group, Post Office revenue, previously included in other 

operating income, is now recognised in statutory sales. In order to ensure comparability 2017 full year 
revenue, gross margin, gross profit and other operating income have been restated. Details of the 
restatements can be found in note 4 on page 101. 

Financial review continued

“ Cash generation 

continues to support 
investment in our 
strategic plans, whilst 

reducing debt.”

1  To better reflect the core operations of the Group, Post Office revenue, previously included in other 

operating income, is now recognised in statutory sales. In order to ensure comparability 2017 full year 
revenue, gross margin, gross profit and other operating income have been restated. Details of the 
restatements can be found in note 4 on page 101. 

2  The HMRC ruling relates to missed payment in relation to a number of colleagues opening and closing 

stores outside of scheduled working hours. We have recently introduced biometric scanners in-store that 
monitor colleague time and attendance to ensure we can accurately manage our payroll.

24  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Good cost management in the face 
of significant headwinds
We continued to face cost pressures during the 
year, the most significant being wage inflation as 
a result of further increases in the National Minimum 
Wage and National Living Wage, which since 
inception in 2016 have resulted in 4–5% annual 
inflation in our biggest cost line. 

Adjusting items include £(1.7)m associated with the 
failure of P&H and £(4.9)m resulting from the set-up 
of our new partnership with Morrisons, which has 
now been expensed in 2018 rather than spread over 
the life of the contract. Included within this £(4.9)m 
cost is store set-up and merchandising, clearance of 
displaced product lines, new product establishment 
and other incremental store costs. 

We have kept good control of costs and in 
aggregate administrative expenses, before 
adjusting items, as a percentage of revenue, 
were broadly flat year-on-year at 25.1% (2017: 25.0%). 

This has in part been supported by ongoing 
investment in systems and processes; for 
example, the introduction of colleague time 
and attendance technology.

In the face of continued cost pressures it is also 
essential to keep our estate under review to ensure 
that we maintain a sustainably profitable network 
of stores. We continue to enhance the quality of the 
estate through both the acquisition of high potential 
convenience stores and the planned closure or 
disposal of underperforming stores. During the 
year, we acquired 11 convenience stores and 
closed or disposed of 66 newsagents and smaller 
convenience stores.

Operating profit impacted by supply chain 
disruption and transition to a new supply partner
Other operating income1 decreased by £1.0m to 
£6.8m (2017: £7.8m1) reflecting a lower level of ATM 
cash withdrawals and lower commission rates in line 
with market trends.

Operating profit before adjusting items (see note 6 
for definition), decreased to £18.3m (2017: £31.4m), 
impacted by the supply chain disruption 
and transition. 

In total there were £(2.6)m of gross (pre-tax) 
adjusting items. This comprised £(14.5)m of costs 
and £11.9m of income. Net adjustments (post-tax) 
were £0.8m. 

We also had adjusting items of £(0.6)m relating to 
pensions following the impact on our schemes of 
the GMP equalisation judgment made against 
Lloyds Banking Group and £(1.2)m of other 
adjustments, principally relating to fines for a 
historic health and safety incident (see page 31) 
and the cost of an HMRC ruling on minimum wage 
compliance.2

In addition, we had £(6.0)m of costs associated with 
closures and impairment and a net gain of £11.9m 
in property profits following the acceleration of our 
sale and leaseback activity, which was materially 
larger in 2018 than had been anticipated.

As well as releasing immediate value through 
this programme, the proceeds have allowed us 
to continue our capital investment programme 
including store refreshes, as well as reduce our net 
debt to a level materially better than expected.

We expect the final tranche of sale and leaseback 
transactions relating to the major acquisition in 2017 
to conclude in the first half of 2019.

Finance costs increased to £8.0m (2017: £6.7m). 
This reflects the increase in our average debt as 
we annualised the major acquisition in 2017.

Profit on ordinary activities before taxation 
decreased to £7.9m (2017: £18.4m). This was 
impacted by the £2.6m of adjusting items described 
above, alongside the impact of supply chain 
disruption on sales and gross margin, partially offset 
by transitional support. However, included within this 
profit measure was £6.1m of net property profits 
(being the combination of sale and leaseback 
gains, impairments and store closures).

Before adjusting items, profit before tax was  
£10.5m (2017: £26.3m).

Tax
The tax charge for the period decreased to £1.0m 
(2017: £4.2m), representing an effective tax rate 
of 12.9% (2017: 22.9%). The difference between the 
current statutory rate of 19.0% and the effective 
tax rate excluding the impact of non-deductible 
adjusting items of 26.6% in the period is due to the 
sale and leaseback and closure cost transactions, 
all of which are classified as adjusting items.

Earnings per share
Basic earnings per share reduced to 5.9 pence 
(2017: 12.3 pence). Adjusted earnings per share 
were 6.7 pence (2017: 18.3 pence). 

Dividend per share 
The Board has recommended a final dividend of 
0.6 pence per share (2017: 6.9 pence). The total 
dividend for the period of 4.0 pence per share 
(2017: 10.3 pence), reflects our commitment to 
provide returns to shareholders. Our policy of a 
50% payout ratio to profit after tax (before adjusting 
gains but after adjusting losses), is unchanged.

Improved payment terms drives an increase in 
current assets and liabilities
Total shareholder funds at the end of the year 
reduced by £4.4m to £141.5m (2017: £145.9m).

This reflects a reduction in the book value of 
goodwill and other intangibles, property, plant and 
equipment by £7.4m to £345.1m (2017: £352.5m) 
following our store closure and sale and 
leaseback programmes.

Current assets at the end of the period increased 
to £147.7m (2017: £130.6m). This increase of £17.1m is 
a result of an increase in stock of £1.2m and trade 
receivables of £2.2m, plus an increase in cash and 
cash equivalents of £14.3m. 

Our current liabilities increased to £220.8m 
(2017: £173.4m), reflecting higher trade and other 
payables as a result of our improved payment terms. 

Non-current liabilities reduced to £144.7m 
(2017: £177.6m), reflecting reduced borrowings.

Pension schemes 
We operate two defined benefit pension schemes, 
the TM Group Pension Scheme and the TM Pension 
Plan, both of which are closed to future accrual.

The combined accounting surplus (based on 
corporate bond yields) in the two schemes at the 
end of the period was £11.9m (2017: £10.3m), as a 
result of strong returns on assets.

The last actuarial review of the two schemes in June 
2017 concluded that the combined funding deficit 
of our two pension schemes was £12.6m.

The Company currently contributes approximately 
£1.6m per year, inclusive of fees and levies.

Strong cash generation supports deleveraging 
and investment in strategic initiatives
Cash generation continues to support investment 
in our strategic plans, whilst reducing debt levels.

Net cash provided by operating activities increased 
in the year to £61.8m (2017: £54.2m). This was aided 
by the transition to our new wholesale supplier with 
more favourable payment terms, and proceeds 
from the sale and leaseback programme.

Adjusted EBITDA (see note 6 on page 102 for 
definition), one of our key performance indicators, 
fell by £9.0m to £35.0m (2017: £44.0m), impacted by 
the supply chain disruption and transition.

We continue to invest in the business for growth, 
including our programme of store acquisitions 
and refreshes, alongside the development and 
extension of our services and food-to-go offer.

In the period, alongside our acquisitions, we 
completed 59 store refreshes and delivered five 
new Subways in our stores.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Gross profit1

£321.1m

+4.5% 2017

2018

2017

2016

£321.1m

£307.4m

£255.0m

Dividend

4.0p

10.3p 2017

Net cash from operating activities

 £61.8m

£54.2m 2017

1  To better reflect the core operations of the Group, Post Office 

revenue, previously included in other operating income, is now 
recognised in statutory sales. In order to ensure comparability 2017 
full year revenue, gross margin, gross profit and other operating 
income have been restated. Details of the restatements can be 
found in note 4 on page 101.

25

Financial review continued

Net debt1

£98.6m

£142.2m 2017

Net debt/adj. EBITDA ratio1

2.8x

3.2x 2017

After £26.3m of proceeds, predominantly from 
our sale and leaseback programme, net capital 
expenditure (which excludes the acquisition of 
stock), was £(1.0)m (2017: £20.3m). 

Net finance expense of £8.0m was higher than the 
prior year, reflecting increased borrowings following 
the major acquisition that completed in July 2017. 
The interim and final dividends paid in the period 
totalled £11.9m.

Changes to banking terms provide flexibility
In 2016, we refinanced to support our major 
acquisition in 2017. This included a £100m working 
capital facility and a £100m repayment term 
loan. Both of these elements run through until 
July 2021, with the interest rate reducing as the 
business deleverages. 

However, in light of the challenges we faced in the 
year, during the summer we initiated discussions 
with our banking syndicate to make a number of 
changes to the terms of our banking arrangements. 

1  The Group has defined and outlined the purpose of its alternative 

performance measures, including its key measures, in the glossary  
of terms on pages 125–126.

26  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

These included increasing the covenant headroom 
and increasing flexibility in the facilities. All of 
these agreed changes will provide extra flexibility 
to deliver our convenience strategy.

Net debt at the end of the period was £98.6m  
(2017: £142.2m), representing 2.8 times adjusted 
EBITDA (2017: 3.2 times adjusted EBITDA). 

At the end of 2018 the banking covenant on 
net debt: adjusted EBITDA was 3.0x and this is 
maintained throughout 2019, other than at the end 
of the first quarter when it is 3.25x.

At the end of the period, drawings against the 
total facility were £125.5m (2017: £154.5m).

Future outlook
In the short term, mitigating cost pressures will 
continue to be a priority. In addition to a further 
c.5% increase in the National Living Wage, we will 
need to manage significant energy cost inflation 
and additional rental costs following the sale and 
leaseback programme. To improve efficiency we 
are continuing to invest in systems and processes, 
alongside pursuing further estate optimisation. 
We have already taken some further action in the 
new financial year, including a head office and 
overheads efficiency review.

Alongside a strengthened balance sheet, rebuilding 
gross margin momentum will be our key focus.

I am very much looking forward to working with 
Jonathan and the team to further our strategic 
plans in 2019 and beyond.

Robbie Bell
Chief Financial Officer

Non-Financial Information Statement
We aim to comply with the new Non-Financial 
Reporting requirements as set out in sections 
414CA and 414CB of the Companies Act 2006.

Throughout the Annual Report and Accounts 
we report certain information on environmental, 
employee and social matters but in our Social 
and environmental review we have set out 
a summary of the Group’s approach for the 
five areas covered by the new requirements, 
together with signposts to other relevant 
sections of the Annual Report and Accounts.

Environmental information pages 32-33

Employees pages 28-31

Human rights page 31

Social matters page 28

Anti-corruption and anti-bribery page 31

Business model pages 12-13

A number of Group policies and internal 
standards/guidelines are not published 
externally. Defining and implementing risk-
related policies is an important element to 
our overall approach to risk management. 
Robust processes and controls to identify and 
report key policy outcomes are in place and 
were followed in 2018.

Social and environmental review

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

McColl’s
and
responsibility

We are committed to operating responsibly, 
supporting neighbourhoods where our 
customers live, and our colleagues work.

27

Social and environmental review continued

Our vision is to be your neighbourhood’s 
favourite shop. We will only achieve this 
vision if we are a good neighbour in all 
respects and that means managing 
our environmental impact, supporting 
local communities and looking after 
our colleagues.

With everyday access to fresh food and groceries, 
plus a range of services such as ATMs, bill payment, 
Post Offices and online order collection points, our 
stores provide a vital service to lots of communities. 
In fact, based on a recent survey, convenience 
stores and Post Offices are the two services that 
have the most positive impact on a local area*.

Community champions
Our role in the local community goes beyond being 
a neighbourhood retailer and our stores are actively 
involved in supporting their local communities. 
Through the ‘Making a Difference Locally’ scheme, 
where a proportion of sales we make on selected 
products are donated to a charity fund, we have 
supported a range of local causes, chosen by each 
store, including scout groups, schools, hospitals and 
local charities.

To date we have supported over 500 local 
organisations, charities and good causes.

Through our Halloween charity campaign 
colleagues and customers also raised money to 
support St George’s University Hospital’s research 
into sudden cardiac death in young people.

We recently presented them with a cheque for 
£200,000 which brings our total to over £1.2m 
in funds to support this important research.

Colleagues

Making all the difference
Excellent customer service is essential to the success 
of our business and that’s why it’s a strategic priority 
for us. We can only deliver excellent customer 
service with the hard work and dedication of our 
colleagues. We have 20,551 colleagues, including 
over 5,500 Home News Deliverers, and altogether 
we employ the equivalent of 8,879 full-time 
colleagues. Many of our colleagues live locally to 
our stores which helps give them a strong sense 
of community and customers consistently rate us 
highly on colleague friendliness and helpfulness. 
In the HIM! Convenience Tracking Programme 2018 
on average customers scored us 9.3 out of 10 for 
this measure.

*  Association of Convenience Stores Local Shop Report 2018.

28  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Listening to our colleagues
We want all our colleagues to feel a part of 
McColl’s. Making sure they are engaged is really 
important to us, so that they enjoy working for 
McColl’s and management can take into account 
their views when making decisions that will 
impact them.

We hold a series of regular business briefings and 
senior manager meetings that give colleagues an 
opportunity to ask questions and give feedback. 
We also conduct an annual colleague survey 
and an interim ‘pulse’ survey. This enables all our 
colleagues to share their views on working for 
McColl’s, and helps us identify things we need 
to improve on. Last year, over 90% of colleagues 
said that they enjoy their job and over 80% would 
recommend McColl’s as a great place to work.

We are also rolling out our colleague forums that will 
give us an opportunity to engage 250 colleagues 
on a deeper level to really understand any issues or 
concerns they may have and gain more insight into 
the data behind our colleague survey. 

Through our business briefings, annual retail 
exhibition and colleague magazine, we keep 
colleagues updated on business strategy and 
performance, as well as any broader financial or 
economic factors that may impact us.

We encourage colleague involvement in our 
strategic performance through operation of a 
performance-related bonus scheme which applies 
to over 100 senior employees and provides an 
incentive to them. We also operate an active sales 
incentive that gives stores the opportunity to earn 
a bonus each period, creating an incentive for 
retail colleagues.

Developing our people
Whether they are at the start of their career with 
McColl’s or looking to take the next step, we 
are investing in our colleagues and making sure 
they have the right skills they need to do their 
job. We want all our colleagues to be their best 
and to help drive individual performance we 
have introduced a new process called ‘talking 
performance’ that makes it easier to have effective 
conversations and support all colleagues.

For those colleagues wishing to progress, we 
operate our successful ‘onward and upward’ 
development programme focusing on some of the 
key roles within the business. We have a good track 
record of promoting colleagues with 58% of Store 
Manager vacancies being filled internally, 51% of our 
Area Managers having been promoted from store 
management and 60% of our Regional Managers 
having been promoted from area management. 
Many of our Store Managers started out with us on 
a paper round or as Sales Assistants, underlining the 
career opportunities we provide and the role we 
play for local people and the younger generation. 
We also have a successful apprenticeship 
programme, with 150 colleagues currently enrolled 
on the programme.

To help us identify individuals who have the 
potential to broaden their skills and move to 
more senior roles, we have also rolled out a new 
performance framework. Also, to ensure our leaders 
have the right skills to do their job, all managers are 
being offered coaching in our six new leadership 
skills – empathy, collaboration, results focus, leading 
change, developing yourself and others, and 
customer focus.

Rewarding and recognising our people
We offer a range of benefits for colleagues as 
well as flexible working opportunities. Through our 
colleague handbook, our online colleague portal 
updates and our Talking Shop magazine, we 
explain the benefits that are available. These range 
from colleague discount in our stores to health 
care plans and a wide range of offers on days out 
and experiences.

We know how important it is that colleagues feel 
valued and are recognised for their hard work. 
This year we celebrated outstanding contributions 
from a number of our store colleagues at our annual 
awards evening.

29

Social and environmental review continued

Supporting women to reach their potential
The Women at McColl’s programme aims to develop the next female 
leaders in the business. As part of the programme, the colleagues involved 
wanted to find a way to work together and demonstrate our role as 
community champions. Supporting Girlguiding was an obvious choice – their 
events, adventures and regular meetings empower girls to be their best and 
become confident women. It seemed fitting, 100 years on from Parliament 
passing the law giving women the vote, to host a group of 120 girls to 
celebrate women, and the Girlguiding Association, through history at our 
Retail Support Centre in Brentwood. 

30  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Gender diversity (based on actual  
year-end headcount)

Board of Directors

Male  5

Female  2

29%

71%

Senior managers – Directors and managers

Male  37

Female  18

33%

Store managers

Male  726

Female  823

All colleagues

Male  5,700

Female  10,816 

35%

67%

47%

53%

65%

Fostering diversity and inclusion
We are an equal opportunities employer. We recruit 
and promote based on suitability and capability 
and do not discriminate against colleagues on 
the basis of age, disability, gender, marital or civil 
partnership status, pregnancy or maternity, race, 
colour, nationality, ethnic or national origin, religion 
or belief, or sexual orientation. These principles of 
non-discrimination and equality of opportunity also 
apply to the way in which colleagues treat visitors, 
customers, suppliers and former colleagues.

If a colleague develops a disability during their 
employment with us we consider the matter 
carefully, trying to accommodate colleagues’ 
needs, and if it is not possible to make reasonable 
adjustments to help them overcome any difficulties 
we try to find an alternative solution such as a 
different role.

From April 2018, the UK Government requires all 
employers with more than 250 employees to publish 
their gender pay gap, showing the difference in the 
average pay between men and women across the 
entire business, regardless of job role.

65% of our colleagues are women and our gender 
pay gap in 2018 was 2.7% (the UK average gender 
pay gap is 17.9% – ONS, 2018), compared to 3.0% 
in 2017. We are confident that men and women 
are paid the same salary for fulfilling the same job 
role at McColl’s. We have made good progress in 
terms of the proportion of women represented in 
the highest paid quartile. However, a gender pay 
gap still exists in our business because women are 
under-represented in some of the most senior roles.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

We know that taking considered and deliberate 
action to ensure talented women progress is 
important, together with instilling an inclusive 
culture. Last year, we launched our Women at 
McColl’s programme to develop the skills and 
confidence in women who have the potential to 
move to more senior roles. Our leadership team has 
completed unconscious bias training and all senior 
managers will have accessed this by the end of 
2019. We know that childcare commitments are one 
of the barriers to women progressing and we have 
reviewed our flexible working policy with the aim 
of providing more options for working parents.

More information on the results of our gender 
pay gap analysis and our approach to 
developing female talent can be found at 
www.mccollsplc.co.uk/genderpaygap.

Health and safety
We continue to demonstrate our commitment to 
health and safety across the Group. It is discussed 
by the Board, and through our health and safety 
committee we take a consistent and collaborative 
approach to creating a safe place for our 
colleagues, customers and visitors.

All initiatives are managed and monitored through 
a health and safety committee of Executives and 
Senior Management, together with the Health 
and Safety Manager.

In 2018, all Retail Board Directors and Senior 
Operations Managers completed nationally 
recognised training in health and safety.

As an increasingly food-led convenience business, 
food safety is a priority. In 2018, we launched our 
‘strive for five’ programme designed to drive a 
consistent standard of food excellence across 
all stores and our field management teams all 
completed nationally recognised qualifications 
in food safety.

Colleague safety remains a key focus and we 
continued to invest in colleague safety technology 
across key locations, working with our two partners, 
SoloProtect and Positive Response, to install, and 
train colleagues to use lone working devices. 

These devices have panic alarms connected 
to monitoring centres with audio capability and 
improved police response. Our partnership with 
Kingdom Services provides guarding cover in 
some of our more vulnerable stores; and our 
partnership with National Business Crime Solutions, 
provides us with a vital link to other retailers and the 
Police, allowing intelligence to be shared quickly 
and efficiently.

In addition, we work closely with insurers, 
brokers and local authorities to advance our risk 
management, for example, by increasing proactive 
risk management in stores. By improving the level 
of compliance across our business we saw a 
continued downturn in both employee and public 
liability claims, although across a large estate of 
stores, there are inevitably incidents and accidents. 

We recognise we have a duty of care to understand 
and address the risks within the business in order to 
ensure, as far as possible, we keep our colleagues 
and customers safe. Where there are incidents, we 
examine the circumstances and draw learnings 
from what occurred so that we can continually 
improve our approach to safety.  In December 
2017, we received a fine of £0.6m relating to a 
historic health and safety incident following the 
installation of a ramp at one of our stores by a third 
party. Alongside the contractor involved, we take 
responsibility for this regretful incident and have 
taken a number of actions relating to contractor 
works, monitoring risk assessment, issue escalation 
and local training to ensure that the risk of such an 
event in the future is materially reduced.

Looking ahead
Our colleagues are our greatest asset and in the 
year ahead we will continue to work to ensure that 
every colleague feels welcome at McColl’s, that 
they feel safe at work, that they have the training 
they need to do their job, and that they have the 
opportunity to progress if they wish to.

Human rights
We treat people in line with internationally recognised human rights 
principles. The Group does not have a specific human rights policy; 
however, a number of policies are in place that demonstrate effective 
management of human rights issues in the business, including an Anti-Bribery 
and Anti-Corruption Policy, Anti-Harassment & Bullying Policy, Health and 
Safety Policy and a Policy for Speaking up in Confidence.

We are absolutely committed to preventing modern slavery in all 
our activities and ensuring that our supply chain is free from slavery 
and trafficking. Our Modern Slavery Statement for the year 2018/19 
(pursuant to section 54 of the Modern Slavery Act 2015) can be found 
at www.mccollsplc.co.uk/modernslaverystatement.

31

Social and environmental review continued

Reducing single-use plastics
We are committed to reducing single-use plastics. We have engaged our 
wholesale supply partner Morrisons to ensure that they are using appropriate 
packaging and understand the steps that they are taking to address this 
important environmental issue. They have set a target for all own brand 
packaging to be reusable, recyclable or compostable by 2025, which will 
include the Safeway range sold in McColl’s.

32  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Environment
As part of our commitment to being a responsible 
business, we aim to act in a sustainable way, 
through driving efficiency, reducing waste, 
and improving recycling and compliance.

Improving energy efficiency
We have an ongoing commitment to improving 
our energy efficiency. Many of our stores have live 
energy monitors so we can see how much energy 
each store uses in real time, which enables us to 
actively manage them accordingly. 

We continue to remove surplus or particularly 
inefficient equipment from our stores and install 
‘last person out’ switches (where all the lights can 
be switched off via one switch), as well as photocells 
that switch lighting on and off when areas 
aren’t used.

Our store refit programme, Project Refresh, is helping 
us become more energy-efficient as we replace 
older refrigeration with new, more efficient models. 
This has led to as much as a 20% reduction in 
consumption in some stores.

In 2018, the energy-saving measures we have put 
in place have helped us reduce our LFL energy 
consumption by a further 0.5%, despite increasing 
our overall chilled and frozen space. We have also 
refreshed our energy policy and set new targets for 
reducing our carbon footprint.

To reduce our energy use in the years ahead we 
will work closely with our trusted energy consultants 
and partners. In 2018, we signed up to a new three-
year SMARTservices programme with BIU, a leading 
energy and utility consultancy. This will allow us to 
work with their experts and use extensive data to 
identify opportunities across the estate to drive 
efficiency. We will be investing in our building energy 
management systems to give us greater control of 
our energy use at site level and surveying our most 
energy intensive sites in order to make targeted 
investment in energy-efficient technology. 

We will also continue to engage with colleagues 
across the business to make sure they are following 
the correct routines and processes to minimise 
energy use at source.

Managing waste

Recycling 
Through our arrangements with our key wholesale 
supply partners we recycle plastic and cardboard 
used in our business. The same lorries that arrive with 
products leave with plastic and cardboard, so no 
additional miles are involved – it’s a neat energy- 
efficient way to recycle packaging.

Food waste
Our regular waste management routines ensure 
that we maintain very low levels of food waste. 
We have a strong focus on managing waste 
and it’s a key metric for all our Store Managers.

We conduct weekly reviews of the previous weeks’ 
waste which can result in a number of different 
actions, including, working with our wholesale 
distributors to supply smaller case sizes; changing 
our ordering algorithms; reviewing product quality 
and pricing; changing product pack sizes; reducing 
distribution of particular products, and in some 
cases delisting; and store training to improve waste 
routines such as stock rotation and mark-downs.

We are a supporter of The Grocer’s campaign to 
reduce food waste, which aims to unite the grocery 
industry in tackling this important issue.

Climate change
We recognise the risk that climate change poses 
to our business and manage this by reducing 
carbon emissions throughout our operations. 
We continue to invest in ongoing carbon reduction 
initiatives, including LED lighting and energy-efficient 
refrigeration. We are committed to reducing our 
carbon emissions and achieved a 10.5% reduction 
in 2018.

Our overall carbon emissions were 48,033 tonnes 
CO2 (2017: 53,651 tonnes CO2). Scope 1 emissions 
were broadly flat year-on-year as increased fuel 
consumption, following the set-up of our temporary 
hub and spoke distribution network, was offset to 
some degree by a fall in refrigeration emissions 
as we have invested in the estate. Scope 2 
emissions fell year-on-year, principally as a result 
of a significant reduction in the emission factor 
for UK electricity. Our carbon intensity ratio, which 
measures the level of emissions per £100,000 of 
revenue, reduced to 3.9, down from 4.7 in 2017.

The Group’s total greenhouse gas (GHG) footprint 
is shown in the table below.

The Group is required to measure and report 
direct and indirect GHG emissions pursuant 
to the Companies Act 2006 (Strategic Report 
and Directors’ Report) Regulations 2013. This is 
the fifth GHG emissions report in line with UK 
mandatory reporting requirements set out by 
the Department for Environment, Food and 
Rural Affairs (DEFRA) and we have therefore 
expressed the report alongside the ‘base 
year’ of 2014 for comparison. The mandatory 
requirement is for the disclosure of the Scope 1 
and 2 emissions only. Scope 1 emissions include 
heating (gas), vehicle fuel and fugitive emissions 
(refrigerant leakage). Scope 2 emissions include 
purchased electricity. 

Emissions data for period 27 November 2017 to 25 November 2018

Scope 1
Fuel combustion (natural gas, vehicle fuels and other fuels)
Refrigerants

Scope 1 total
Scope 2
Purchased electricity

Total of Scope 1 and 2

2014  
Tonnes  
CO2(e) 
(base year)

2,125
2,122

4,247

51,884

56,131

2017  
Tonnes  
CO2(e)

2,357
4,569

6,926

46,725

53,651

2018  
Tonnes  
CO2(e)

2,460
4,401

6,861

41,172

48,033

Intensity – CO2(e) tonnes per £100,000 of revenue

6.1

4.7

3.9

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

•  The Group has reported on all the measured emissions sources 
required under the Companies Act 2006 (Strategic Report and 
Directors’ Reports) Regulations 2013

•  The Group has used the guidance as set out in DEFRA’s 

Environmental Reporting Guidelines: including mandatory 
GHG emissions reporting guidance, dated June 2013

•  Emission factors are based upon UK Government conversion 
factors for Company Reporting 2018. The electricity emissions 
are influenced favourably by a reduced emission factor 
for electricity in 2018, reflecting the UK’s continued use of 
renewable energy in the overall electricity generation mix

•  The Group has engaged a consultancy firm, The Miles 

Consultancy, to oversee the collection of vehicle data and 
provide guidance on complying with appropriate regulations. 
Data collected has included fuel use and mileage, and 
business mileage has been calculated on the basis of actual 
fuel use recorded, and emissions calculated by applying the 
2018 emission factors for diesel and petrol (bio-fuel blends)

•  The figures disclosed above for 2018 and the methodology 
used to collate the information has been reviewed and 
verified by Project Rome Ltd

•  For electricity, gas and other fuels, consumption data has 
been extracted from billing information from the start of 
the reporting period to the date of the last bill received for 
each type of supply. Therefore some extrapolation has been 
required in order to calculate the full 52-week consumption 
figure. Data has been provided by British Independent Utilities

•  Petrol and fuel data has been collated from information 

received from the Group’s fleet management consultant, 
and for 2018 full year actual data is reported

•  Refrigerant data has been calculated by reference to 

individual items of equipment and then extrapolating this 
based on an estimated level of equipment within each 
property used by the Group. The methodology employed 
utilises annual leakage rates as set out in Appendix C of the 
Environmental Reporting Guidelines for mandatory GHG 
emission applying the Screening Methodology

33

 
Principal risks and uncertainties

How we identify and manage risk

Risk management framework

Risk
identification

Risk
reporting

Risk 
assessment

Strategy
setting

Risk
policies

Risk
ownership

Risk
appetite

Risk identification and assessment
Risks are identified and assessed at all levels 
within the organisation, from individual store 
risk assessments through to identification and 
assessment of Group-wide strategic threats. 
We operate detailed procedures and appropriate 
training in store to ensure the safety and security of 
our colleagues and customers and protection of 
our assets. At Group level, we look at a wide range 
of factors including customer trends, competition, 
economic conditions, regulatory developments, 
technological issues, counterparty security and 
financial matters to work out the main threats to 
our business.

Risk ownership
Once a risk has been identified, responsibility 
for management of that risk is clearly defined. 
This equally applies in our stores, where an 
appropriate risk culture promotes personal 
responsibility for operating safely and for 
carrying out regular checks on potential hazards. 
Where a hazard cannot be dealt with simply and 
immediately, a reporting process exists to escalate 
the matter for resolution. Similarly, at Group level, 
risks relating to, for example, finance, legal, data, 
trading partners and operations, are monitored and 
managed through a variety of controls, including 
detailed procedures and delegations of authority to 
appropriately experienced and qualified individuals 
or groups such as our Group Health, Safety and 
Compliance Committee.

McColl’s, like all businesses, is 
exposed to a number of internal 
and external factors which can 
positively or negatively affect 
its performance. Whilst minor 
variations in circumstances and 
outcomes will always occur, 
it is essential that we take a 
proactive approach to those 
significant matters that could 
threaten successful delivery of 
our short and long term goals.

Our risk framework seeks to identify those threats, 
quantify how likely it is they will occur and how 
significant their impact could be. Mitigating actions 
are then applied to reduce the likelihood and 
impact to a level that is acceptable to the Board. 
The effectiveness of those actions is monitored to 
ensure that they deliver the intended outcome. 
Our understanding of these risks also informs our 
strategic choices for the business. 

We adopt a continual process of risk identification, 
assessment, management and monitoring. As our 
strategy and plans evolve and the environment in 
which we operate changes, our assessment and 
management of risk must keep pace.

34  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Risk appetite and risk policies
Having quantified and understood our risks, the 
Board, guided by the Audit & Risk Committee, 
considers what level of risk can be accepted in 
pursuit of our strategic goals. The Board requires all 
risks to be appropriately managed and, where they 
cannot be sufficiently reduced or removed entirely, 
considers whether the risk should be transferred, 
for example through insurance cover or hedging 
arrangements. A vital component of the Board’s 
risk related responsibilities is that of fostering an 
appropriate risk culture. 

During 2017 four new values were adopted, which 
were incorporated into some of our risk-related 
policies and introduced into others as they fell 
due for review during 2018.

Our values are:

Customer
first

Simple and
consistent

Caring and
compassionate

Community
champions

Having understood the threats faced and the 
extent to which they have been reduced, 
eliminated or transferred, the Board determines 
its risk appetite and the strategy that can be 
delivered within acceptable risk parameters. 
A new or amended strategy can often give rise 
to new risks and these need to be identified and 
assessed and built into the management and 
reporting processes described above.

Risk reporting
The reporting of risk is an important step in 
the overall process. Reporting not only raises 
awareness and initiates discussion, it can also 
provide additional insight into the aggregation 
of risks that may not be immediately apparent 
when a single factor is considered or managed 
in isolation. 

Risks, both operational and strategic, are reported 
to our Group Health, Safety and Compliance 
Committee (formerly known as the Group Risk 
Committee), which comprises our Retail Board 
members, Health & Safety Manager and Company 
Secretary. This Committee also brings together 
senior representatives from all areas of the business 
to consider collectively, and from their different 
functional perspectives, the more significant risks 
faced by the business.

The Group Health, Safety and Compliance 
Committee reports, and escalates as appropriate, 
matters of risk to the Retail Board which has 
responsibility for supporting the Chief Executive 
in the delivery of the Group strategy and business 
objectives. The Audit & Risk Committee periodically 
reviews risks and makes recommendations to the 
Board. Individual matters of a significant nature are 
also escalated to the Board where appropriate.

Resources and structure
We have organised our internal resources in order 
to ensure that the risk management framework 
is appropriately understood by colleagues and 
embedded throughout the business. 

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Risk management structure

Our risk framework is supported by the risk management structure 
detailed below:

Board

Executive Directors

Audit & Risk Committee

Retail Board

Health, Safety and 
Compliance Committee

Functional Areas

Colleagues

External support 
and expertise

35

Principal risks and uncertainties continued

The risk management processes 
described above are continual 
and risks evolve. However, at 
present, the Board, with the 
assistance of the Audit & Risk 
Committee, considers the 
following to be the principal  
risks facing the Group.

Maintained

Increased

36  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

l

i

a
p
c
n
i
r
P

k
s
i
R

f

o
e
r
u
t

a
N

k
s
i
R
e
h
t

Strategy

Competition

Customer Offer

If the Board either adopts the wrong 
strategy or does not implement it effectively 
the aims of the business, its performance 
and reputation may suffer.

We operate in a highly competitive 
environment, which is continually 
changing and has been subject to 
ongoing consolidation. Failure to 
maintain market share could have an 
adverse effect on our core business.

Customer shopping habits are influenced 
by a wide range of factors. If we do not 
respond to their changing needs they 
are more likely to shop with a competitor, 
resulting in falling revenues.

•  Our strategic development is led 
by an experienced Board and 
Senior Management 

•  An annual strategic review takes place 
alongside our budget-setting process

•  The McColl’s strategy is widely 

communicated and understood 
across the business

•  Business plans are developed, 

monitored and reviewed against 
strategic KPIs

•  Senior Management are incentivised 
with performance-related rewards 
to deliver our strategic goals

s
n
o
i
t

a
g
i
t
i

m
k
s
i
R

•  We monitor competitor activity and 

customer trends

•  Regular meetings are held with key 

suppliers to optimise our offer

•  We are increasing brand awareness 

through marketing 

•  Improvement of our estate and stores 

is ongoing 

•  Local refit programmes are undertaken 
to counter specific competitive threats

•  We have launched the Safeway brand 

in store to differentiate our offer

•  Membership of third party organisations 
(such as the Association of Convenience 
Stores) gives us greater insight into the 
convenience channel trends 
and developments

•  Our Customer Director has enhanced 

the Retail Board’s capability to address 
changing customer needs 

•  Promotional programmes offer 

customers great value

•  Our strong customer service 

standards are reflected in our evolving 
brand strategy

•  We have increased our marketing ad 
campaigns and seasons events, both 
in store and through local advertising

•  We complete detailed customer 

research for key projects, for example 
our store refurbishment programme

•  We have launched our presence 
in social media to better engage 
with customers

s Key strategic challenges for 2019 include 
e
the continuing work to deliver the supply 
g
n
chain benefits from our partnership with 
a
h
Morrisons and further developing our 
c
convenience offer. Ongoing change 
t
n
and consolidation in the sector may 
e
r
also impact our business and require 
r
u
C
us to adjust our strategy accordingly.

We will work through individual category 
reviews to ensure our offer, range and 
price is competitive. Our ongoing store 
refresh programme will enhance our 
customers’ shopping experience.

Working with our new supply partner we 
will focus on the breadth and depth of our 
offer, particularly in key categories such as 
fresh and chilled food. We will also look to 
broaden our seasonal relevance e.g. in non 
food areas.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Supply chain

Supply chain transition

Information Technology

Financial and treasury

We rely on a small number of key 
distributors and may be adversely 
affected by changes in supplier 
dynamics and interruptions in supply.

•  We establish long-term relationships 

with trusted suppliers

•  Our distribution partners maintain their 
own contingency planning as do we

•  We closely monitor supplier 

performance including service levels 
and hold regular discussions with them 
to address any issues (with contractual 
protections in place)

•  We monitor the financial stability of 

key partners

•  We regularly review our supply chain 

arrangements, with full tenders 
completed in 2013 and 2017

•  We have a flexible electronic ordering 

process, with established links to the key 
UK wholesalers

•  Our supply chain partner, Morrisons, 
is undertaking significant pre-Brexit 
planning (including becoming an 
authorised economic operator)

The collapse of P&H in November 2017 
tested our contingency arrangements as 
did the accelerated transition to Morrisons 
supply in 2018. Going forwards into 2019 it is 
important to fully stabilise and then optimise 
arrangements, including responding to the 
outcomes of Brexit. 

During 2018, we transitioned the wholesale 
arrangements for the majority of our estate 
to a new supplier. The accelerated timeline 
introduced additional complexity and risk.

We depend on the reliability and capability 
of key information systems and technology. 
A major failure, a breach, or prolonged 
performance issues with store or head office 
systems could have an adverse impact on 
the business and its reputation.

The main financial risks are the availability 
of short- and long-term funding to meet 
business needs, fluctuations in interest rates, 
movements in energy prices and other post-
Brexit impacts.

•  There is close oversight by the Retail 
Board and Senior Management

•  We undertook a significant amount 
of planning and testing work to 
identify and resolve potential issues 
and have instigated close monitoring 
of performance

•  All business-critical systems are well 

established and are supported by an 
appropriate disaster recovery strategy 
designed to ensure continuity of 
the business 

•  Business continuity plans are tested on 

an annual basis

•  Committed loan facilities are in place to 
deliver our strategy, with amendments in 
the year delivering additional covenant 
headroom (see notes 20 and 27)

•  Funding requirements are managed 
through regular forecasting and 
treasury management

•  We have a dedicated and 

•  Regular reviews assess our vulnerability 

•  The Board approves budgets and 

skilled management team with 
extensive experience of managing 
supply arrangements

and our ability to re-establish operations 
in the event of a failure

business plans 

•  Relationships with lenders are managed 

•  Testing is performed to ensure data is 

through regular meetings

•  We have established clear lines of 

controlled and protected

communication and a joint project 
management approach with our 
new supplier

•  The final phase of the transition will, 
in due course, incorporate all of the 
learnings from 2018

•  Transitional support has been provided 

by our new wholesale partner

•  We are currently investing in a new ERP 
system (Oracle Fusion) to improve head 
office efficiency

•  We have processes in place to ensure 

GDPR compliance

•  Our risks associated with financial 

instruments are disclosed in note 27 
on page 113

Issues relating to availability, product set 
up and cost prices are being worked 
through with suppliers and our new 
wholesale partner. We expect to exit 
2019 with an improved trajectory.

We have a future IT roadmap and have 
plans to upgrade our EPOS systems in the 
next 24 months. We will also continue to 
evolve our store back office systems to 
improve efficiency and effectiveness.

We will continue to work with our banking 
syndicate to optimally manage our funding 
position and further deleverage. We plan 
to conclude our 2017 acquisition sale and 
leaseback programme in H1 2019.

Ensuring supply chain continuity
2018 was marked by significant 
supply chain change and disruption 
for the business, as we transitioned 
arrangements. When P&H collapsed 
into administration in November 2017 
we lost supply to over 700 of our stores 
(principally newsagents and smaller 
convenience stores). We worked 
with both Morrisons and Nisa to 
implement contingency plans and also 
accelerated our transition to Morrisons 
(our partnership was announced 
in summer 2017). This accelerated 
transition, whilst helping to ensure these 
stores continued to trade, has resulted 
in a number of challenges that our 
partners are working hard to address.
Most significantly the McColl’s gross 
margin has been impacted by the 
adoption of temporary terms and a 
delay in realising the benefits of the 
new partnership with Morrisons. It is 
anticipated that further progress will  
be made in 2019, which will also focus  
on the full realisation of the benefits  
of launching Safeway products  
in store. Going forwards, working  
with a FTSE 100 wholesaler provides 
additional reassurance over supply 
chain continuity.

37

Principal risks and uncertainties continued

l

i

a
p
c
n
i
r
P

k
s
i
R

f

o
e
r
u
t

a
N

k
s
i
R
e
h
t

s
n
o
i
t

a
g
i
t
i

m
k
s
i
R

Economy

All our revenue is generated in the UK. Any 
deterioration in the UK economy, for example as 
a consequence of Brexit, could affect consumer 
spending and cost of goods, which in turn would 
impact our sales and profitability.

•  We sell food and household essentials which are 

not considered to be highly discretionary

•  We offer a wide range of products at different 
price points, e.g. value and premium brands

•  Our flexible business model allows us to respond 
to changes in customer behaviour, for example, 
by adapting our ranges

•  We are growing our range of own brand products 

through the rollout of Safeway

•  We are working with supply partners 
and manufacturers to build our Brexit 
contingency plans

s As the impacts of Brexit on the UK economy become 
e
clearer we will continue to evolve our strategy to 
g
n
mitigate any impacts. As included with the section  
a
h
on going concern (page 77) we have modelled 
c
various scenarios to ensure we have sufficient 
t
n
mitigation options.
e
r
r
u
C

38  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Brexit
We recognise that the UK’s planned exit from 
the European Union (EU) creates some risks 
and uncertainties. We do not expect it to have 
a material impact on the business except in 
the event that the UK leaves the EU with no 
deal in place and this results in the most severe 
economic scenario.

Customers
Except in the event of a severe economic shock 
to the UK economy, we do not expect Brexit to 
have any significant impact on the behaviour 
of customers in McColl’s. The grocery sector as 
a whole has a proven record of withstanding 
economic downturn. In recent periods of 
economic uncertainty consumers have tended 
to manage their budgets by shopping little and 
often, locally. Therefore the convenience sector in 
particular is largely protected from, and can even 
benefit from, broader negative economic trends.

Supply chain
It is estimated that around 35% of all the food we 
eat in the UK is sourced from the EU. Due to the 
nature of our product mix, we estimate that the 
proportion of products we source from the EU is 
considerably lower than average.
The most significant risk to food supplies is in the 
event of a no-deal Brexit where import delays 
could mean short shelf life products expire 
before they can reach their destination. We sell a 
relatively low proportion of chilled and fresh food 
with a short shelf life and as such are less exposed 
to this risk than other grocery retailers.
The majority of our products are sourced via 
UK wholesale partners. Morrisons is our largest 
wholesale partner, directly supplying c.1,300 
of our stores. As the UK’s second largest food 
manufacturer, they source and manufacture a 
high proportion of products in the UK. To mitigate 
the risk of a no-deal Brexit Morrisons have applied 
for and been granted “approved economic 
operator status”, which means that goods will be 
fast tracked through customs, hence reducing the 
risk with their non UK suppliers.

Labour
It is likely that in leaving the European Union 
there will be a restriction on free movement that 
could lead to a shortage of low skilled workers. 
We do not believe this presents a significant risk 
to the business because we have a low number 
of transient workers. The majority of our store 
colleagues work on a part-time basis and live 
locally to their store. However, we recognise that 
there is some risk that we could be impacted by 
the UK experiencing a greater demand for low 
skilled workers that could create recruitment 
challenges and lead to wage inflation.

Operational cost base

Regulation

We have a relatively high cost base, consisting 
primarily of salary, property rental and energy costs. 
Increases in these costs without a corresponding 
increase in revenues could adversely impact our 
profitability.

We operate in an environment governed by strict 
regulations to ensure the safety and protection of 
customers, colleagues, shareholders and other 
stakeholders. Regulations include alcohol licensing, 
employment, health and safety, data protection and 
the rules of the Stock Exchange. Failure to comply with 
relevant laws and regulations could result in sanctions 
and reputational damage.

•  We continually seek to remove unnecessary 

•  We have clear accountability for compliance 

complexity from our operational procedures to 
optimise performance

with all laws and regulations

•  Our policies and procedures are designed to 

•  We operate a flexible staffing model aligned to 

meet all relevant requirements

•  We train colleagues to comply with all 

relevant legislation

•  We have established governance groups, such 
as our Health and Safety Strategy Committee to 
review and manage our compliance

•  Through third party memberships and expert 

advice, we keep up to date with evolving statute

revenue levels

•  We monitor legislation and developments related 
to our costs, e.g. minimum wage, rents and energy 
tariffs, to allow us to plan and mitigate increases 

•  Property management is a key function 
with regular review processes in place

•  We minimise energy costs by combining energy 
efficiency initiatives and forward purchasing

•  We regularly retender external contracts to ensure 

they remain market-competitive

•  We have an ongoing programme of estate 
optimisation to remove unprofitable stores

•  We manage exposure to fluctuating energy prices 
by forward buying electricity. We acknowledge 
that the forward contracts in place are derivatives, 
they are treated as a pre-agreed price 
for electricity

National Living Wage and National Minimum Wage 
will again increase above the rate of inflation in 
2019. We have set up a group to focus on delivering 
efficiencies and process improvements in our 
operations.

Regulations impacting our business continue to 
change but we have processes in place to make sure 
we take proper account of regulatory developments 
in the way we conduct our business. 

This Strategic report, which has been prepared in 
accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 
2006, has been approved and signed on behalf of the Board.

Angus Porter
Chairman

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Chairman’s governance statement

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

As a Board we will also be mindful of how we can do 
more to support and promote the McColl’s values:

Compliance with the  
UK Corporate Governance Code

•  Customer first

•  Simple and consistent

•  Caring and compassionate

•  Community champions

It is important that we take the lead on 
incorporating these values into our work. 

Following publication of the new UK Corporate 
Governance Code by the FRC in July 2018, which 
the Company will be reporting against for the 
financial year ending November 2020, the Board 
is reviewing the revised principles and provisions 
and will make any changes deemed necessary 
in due course.

Approved by the Board and signed on its behalf:

Strong corporate 
governance

Angus Porter
Non-Executive Chairman

As Chairman I am pleased to report that the 
Company has continued to strengthen its 
corporate governance arrangements. I and my 
fellow Directors are fully committed to making 
sure governance and leadership of the business 
are sufficiently strong and effective to embrace 
the challenge of becoming a successful grocery 
convenience retailer.

We will be reporting in compliance with the 
2016 Corporate Governance code, but where 
practical will align some content to recognise  
the new July 2018 Governance code

Board leadership 
(including shareholder relations)

The Board is responsible for leading the business in the 
way which it believes is most likely to lead to long-term 
sustainable success. This includes effective engagement 
with our stakeholders and particularly our colleagues

Read more on pages 40 to 44

Division of responsibilities

We ensure we have the right combination of executive 
and non-executive directors without any individual or 
group of individuals who dominate the decision making

Read more on pages 44 to 45

Composition, Succession 
and Evaluation

Our practices aim to ensure that we have a balanced 
board with the appropriate skills to govern the business, 
and an effective evaluation and succession plan. 
The Nomination committee is appointed to act on behalf 
of the Board

Read more on pages 45 to 47

Audit, Risk and Internal control

The Board defines McColl’s strategy, taking account of 
the need to avoid unnecessary or unacceptable risks. 
The Audit and risk committee is appointed to oversee this 
process on behalf of the Board

Read more on pages 51 to 56

Remuneration

Our remuneration policy aims to incentivise strong 
performance whilst avoiding excess. We are also mindful 
of the pay of our colleagues across the business 

Read more on pages 56 to 73

It is the opinion of the Board that the Company has 
been compliant with all the applicable provisions 
of the Code throughout the year under review.

39

Board of Directors

Strong  
leadership

Angus Porter
Non-Executive Chairman 2, 3

Jonathan Miller
Chief Executive 3

Robbie Bell
Chief Financial Officer

Current appointment: Angus was appointed as an 
Independent Non-Executive Director on 1 April 2016 
and was appointed Non-Executive Chairman on 
27 April 2017. 

Key strengths: Angus has extensive knowledge 
and experience in strategy, innovation, and brand 
development as well as significant leadership skills. 

Experience: Angus has held numerous executive and 
non-executive roles across a range of industry sectors, 
including senior marketing and general management 
roles at Mars, BT, Abbey National and WPP. Recently, 
he was Chief Executive of the Professional Cricketers 
Association from 2010–2016, Senior Independent 
Director and Chairman of the Remuneration 
Committee of Punch Taverns Plc. from 2012–2017, and 
a Non-Executive Director of TDC A/S until 2018. 

Other directorships: Angus is Co-Chairman of Direct 
Wines Ltd and a Non-Executive Director of Hilton Food 
Group plc.

Current appointment: Jonathan was appointed 
Chief Executive of McColl’s in 2016. He has worked 
in the Group since 1991 when he was recruited as 
Financial Director of cigarette vending operations, 
becoming Finance Director of retail operations in 
1998. Prior to his current role he was the Group’s Chief 
Financial Officer.

Key strengths: Through his long history with McColl’s, 
Jonathan has developed an in-depth understanding 
of both the business and the wider convenience 
retail market. 

Experience: Jonathan has had a major role in all 
of the key initiatives that have shaped the Group, 
including a secondary buyout in 2005, numerous 
corporate acquisitions and the IPO in 2014. As Chief 
Executive he has put in place a clear strategy and 
vision for the Group and led the major acquisition 
of 298 stores in 2016, the negotiation in 2017 of the 
Group’s new wholesale arrangements with Morrisons 
and in 2018 steered the business through the 
significant disruption following the collapse of P&H.

Current appointment: Robbie was appointed as the 
Group’s Chief Financial Officer in January 2019. 

Key strengths: Robbie has over 20 years of retail and 
finance experience.

Experience: Robbie was appointed CFO of Welcome 
Break in 2017 before taking on the role of CEO in early 
2018, where he managed the sale and ownership 
transition of the business. From 2009–2017 he was CFO 
of Screwfix Direct Limited, a subsidiary of Kingfisher 
plc, where he oversaw significant business growth, 
driven by strong like-for-like sales and an extensive 
store opening programme. He was the UK Finance 
Director of Travelodge from 2006–2008. Prior to this 
he held a number of senior finance positions at 
Tesco PLC, including roles within commercial buying 
and convenience. 

Other directorships: Robbie is a Non-Executive 
Director and Chair of the Audit Committee of UP 
Global Sourcing Holdings plc.

Simon Fuller

It was announced in July 2018 that Simon Fuller, 
Chief Financial Officer, had decided to leave the 
business to pursue his career in another sector. 
He left the business on 22 February 2019 following 
a period of handover to his successor, Robbie 
Bell, who succeeded him on 17 January 2019.

Simon was appointed as the Group’s Chief 
Financial Officer in 2016, having joined  
McColl’s in December 2015 as Deputy  
Chief Financial Officer. 

40  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Dave Thomas
Chief Operating Officer

Current appointment: Dave was appointed as the 
Group’s Chief Operating Officer in 2014 but his history 
with McColl’s dates back to 1998 when he joined 
the business as Regional Manager for convenience. 
He became Operations General Manager in 2000 
and was made Operations Director in 2005.

Key strengths: His long career rooted in the UK 
supermarket and convenience sector means Dave 
has extensive operational knowledge, enabling him 
to orchestrate a process of continual improvement 
and modernisation of the McColl’s offering across our 
evolving estate.

Experience: Dave’s retail career began with Iceland 
where he led a programme of new store openings as 
well as conversion of Bejam stores. Subsequently he 
joined Southern Co-operative as Operations Manager, 
developing a modern convenience format for the 
business. More recently within McColl’s, he successfully 
managed the 2017 conversion of the 298 acquired 
stores to the McColl’s format as well as taking a key 
role in the negotiations and implementation of new 
supply arrangements.

Georgina Harvey
Senior Independent  
Director1, 2, 3

Sharon Brown
Independent Non-Executive 
Director1, 2, 3

Jens Hofma
Independent Non-Executive 
Director1, 2, 3

Current appointment: Georgina was appointed as 
an Independent Non-Executive Director on 7 February 
2014 and is Chairman of the Company’s Remuneration 
Committee. On 24 May 2016 Georgina was appointed 
as the Company’s Senior Independent Director.

Current appointment: Sharon was appointed as an 
Independent Non-Executive Director on 7 February 
2014 and is Chairman of the Company’s Audit & Risk 
Committee. Sharon previously served as the Group’s 
Interim Chairman.

Key strengths: Georgina has significant experience 
across highly competitive consumer-facing markets 
and delivering successful transformational change.

Key strengths: Sharon has deep knowledge of 
finance and audit-related matters, combined with 
over 25 years’ experience in the retail sector. 

Experience: Georgina started her media career at 
Express Newspapers plc where she was appointed 
Advertising Director in 1994. She joined IPC Media 
Limited in 1995 and went on to form IPC Advertising 
in 1998, where she was Managing Director. 
Between 2005 and 2012, Georgina was Managing 
Director, regionals division and a member of the 
Executive Committee of Trinity Mirror.

Other directorships: Georgina is also an Independent 
Non-Executive Director of William Hill PLC and Big 
Yellow Group PLC.

Experience: Sharon is a management accountant 
and has extensive financial experience, gained whilst 
Finance Director and Company Secretary of Dobbies 
Garden Centres Limited between 1998 and 2013. 
She also held a senior financial position within the 
retail division of John Menzies plc from 1991 to 1998. 
She is, and has been, Audit Committee Chairman for 
a number of companies.

Other directorships: Sharon is a Non-Executive Director 
and Audit Committee Chairman of Fidelity Special 
Values PLC, F&C Capital and Income Investment Trust 
plc, and Celtic plc and is a Non-Executive Director  
of a number of limited companies in the retail sector.

Current appointment: Jens was appointed as an 
Independent Non-Executive Director on 1 July 2017. 

Key strengths: Jens has particular expertise in 
consumer goods as well as the restaurant and food-
to-go industry. He also possesses in-depth experience 
of growing multi-site businesses.

Experience: Jens is Chief Executive Officer of Pizza Hut 
Restaurants in the UK. He joined the Pizza Hut business 
in February 2009 and has since led a private equity 
funded buyout of its dine-in restaurants. Prior to his 
involvement with Pizza Hut, Jens spent five years with 
Yum! Brands, working in the UK and in Europe. He has 
also previously worked for Nestlé and McKinsey in 
various European countries.

Other directorships: Jens is Chief Executive Officer 
of Pizza Hut (UK) Limited.

1  Member of the Audit & Risk Committee.

2  Member of the Remuneration Committee.

3  Member of the Nomination Committee.

41

Retail Board
Retail Board

The Group’s Retail 
Board comprises the 
Executive Directors 
and the most senior 
Managers within the 
business. The Retail 
Board is collectively 
responsible for 
supporting the 
Chief Executive in 
delivering the Group’s 
strategic objectives.

Jonathan Miller
Chief Executive

Robbie Bell 
Chief Financial Officer

Dave Thomas
Chief Operating Officer 

Read more on page 40

Read more on page 40

Read more on page 41

Neil Hodge
Information 
Technology Director

Current appointment: Neil was appointed 
Information Technology Director in 2011 
but has worked for the Group since 
1993, initially as Field Support Manager 
and then, from 1997, as Information 
Technology Manager. 

Experience: As well as ensuring the day-
to-day IT and data needs of the Group 
are well serviced, Neil plays a key role in 
the planning and delivery of numerous 
strategic initiatives across the business, the 
majority of which are technology-enabled. 
Before joining McColl’s, Neil worked at 
Dexham Shops and Royal Doulton.

42  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Steve Green
Retail Finance Director 

Karen Bird
Colleague Director 

David Archibald
Development Director 

Peter Miller
Trading Director 

Tim Fairs
Customer Director 

Current appointment: Steve joined 
McColl’s as Retail Finance Director in 
May 2016.

Current appointment: Karen joined 
McColl’s as Colleague Director in 
October 2016.

Current appointment: David was 
appointed Development Director in 2006 
having joined the Group in 1993.

Experience: Since joining McColl’s, 
Steve has restructured the finance team, 
improved controls, and delivered financial 
support to all of the business’s major 
initiatives. Before joining McColl’s, Steve 
was the Group Financial Controller for 
Tesco’s Malaysian business. In total, Steve 
was with Tesco for 14 years, both in the UK 
and overseas.

Experience: Since joining the business, 
Karen has restructured the HR team, 
focusing on the key processes and 
priorities to strengthen the function. 
Karen has developed a strategic HR plan 
for the business, working on capability, 
performance and talent development. 
Karen was previously People Director 
at Tesco, where she worked in both 
HR and Operational roles, including 
leading change programmes on culture 
and service.

Experience: Responsible for our 
acquisitions and estate management, 
David has been instrumental in ensuring 
conversion of the 298 stores to the McColl’s 
format proceeded to plan and is also 
playing a key role in our programme of 
shop refresh activity to deliver significant 
benefits from store modernisation. 
Previously David worked at Independent 
Stores, Fine Fare, Asda, Victoria Wine and 
the Ministry of Defence.

Current appointment: Peter was 
appointed Trading Director in 2015, having 
originally joined McColl’s as Buying Director 
in 2011.

Experience: Peter has a wealth of grocery 
sector experience, ensuring McColl’s 
trading performance is supported through 
effective and competitive supplier 
relationships. Before joining McColl’s, 
Peter was Group Trading Director at SPAR 
UK Ltd. Prior to this, Peter worked as Director 
of Trading at Big Food Group and Group 
Buying Director at Booker PLC.

Current appointment: Tim was appointed 
Customer Director in January 2018.

Experience: Tim is responsible for the 
customer agenda, a key pillar of our 
strategy, by helping to define our brand 
proposition and bringing the McColl’s 
brand to life as well as establishing effective 
relationships with our customers after they 
have left the store. Tim is passionate about 
customers and has extensive relevant 
experience, most recently as VP Marketing 
and E-Commerce at Clintons, and prior 
to that as Head of Marketing at Dixons 
Carphone where he launched the service 
brand KNOWHOW.

43

Corporate governance report

Engaging with Stakeholders

The McColl’s Board has responsibility for ensuring 
that dialogue with shareholders and other stakeholders 
is active and based on a mutual understanding 
of objectives
McColl’s has continued with its investor relations activities, 
which comprise individual meetings with investors, investor 
presentations and investor and analyst store visits. The Board 
receives regular reports on the investor relations programme 
and, as part of this, shareholder views are fed back to 
the Board. 

Specific consultations are undertaken from time to time with 
our major shareholders where deemed necessary. In addition 
the Chairman has direct dialogue with some of the major 
shareholders. The Board is conscious that the views and 
interests of other stakeholders in the business are important. 
Engaging with those other stakeholders is an aspect 
which the Board recognises will be a focus going forward. 
To enhance the Board’s engagement with colleagues across 
the business, an employee survey was carried out in the latter 
part of the year. 

McColl’s general meetings are used to encourage 
investor communication and participation
The McColl’s Board recognises that our shareholders are a 
key group of stakeholders in the business and their views and 
engagement are important. The Annual General Meeting 
provides an essential opportunity for shareholders to meet 
directly with our Directors and, in particular, the Chairmen 
of our Committees. We publicise the outcome of proxy votes 
received in advance of general meetings. 

Shareholders who wish to raise issues with the Company may 
contact us via email at investor.relations@mccolls.co.uk.

Investor Store Visits
During the year we hosted analysts and investors on a 
number of store visits. It’s a great way for them to see the 
business close up and get valuable insight into how we 
operate. It also gives them an opportunity to meet some 
of the wider management team and see how we execute 
our strategic plans such as the store refresh programme.

44  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Division of responsibilities

The matters covered by the schedule are listed below. 
The schedule is periodically reviewed. 

McColl’s is headed by an effective Board which 
is responsible for delivering long-term success in 
the business
The Executive team, under Jonathan’s leadership, is 
ambitious in its vision, responsible in its management, 
cohesive in its leadership and effective in its delivery. 
During what has been a challenging year, Jonathan has 
received outstanding support from his fellow Executives, 
Dave Thomas (Chief Operating Officer) and, until February 
this year, Simon Fuller (Chief Financial Officer). Simon’s 
successor, Robbie Bell, joined the Board on 17 January 2019. 
Simon left the business on 22 February 2019, following an 
orderly handover.

The responsibilities of the Board and the Executive are 
clearly defined and no individual has unfettered powers 
of decision 
The Chief Executive is responsible for delivering the Group’s 
strategy and for its operational performance. The Chief 
Executive is supported in carrying out their responsibilities by 
the Chief Financial Officer and Chief Operating Officer. 

These responsibilities are defined as part of a scheme 
of delegation established by the Board. The scheme of 
delegation is one element of the controls by which the Board 
seeks to ensure that risk is adequately and appropriately 
managed within the business. 

The starting point for those delegations is the schedule of 
matters reserved for the Board. This schedule sets out those 
decisions which will not be delegated to any other group 
or individual but will always require Board sign off.

1.  Strategy and values

2.  Annual budget and business performance

3.  Major acquisitions and disposals and new 

business developments

4.  Risk appetite, risk management and internal controls 

5.  Shareholder communications

6.  Capital structure, borrowings and treasury policy

7.  Dividend payments and recommendations

8.  Key Group entity structure

9.  Board and other senior appointments

10. Corporate governance matters and delegations

11.  Group policies

12.  Pensions and other legal matters

Matters that are not reserved to the Board may be 
delegated, for example, by:

• 

• 

terms of reference to a committee;

role description to an individual;

•  policies and procedures to colleagues within certain 

functions or of a certain grade; or 

•  contract to external parties.

The Group also has a Retail Board comprising the Executive 
Directors and the most senior Managers within the business. 
The Retail Board is collectively responsible for supporting the 
Chief Executive in delivering the Group’s strategic objectives. 
Biographical details for the Retail Board members are 
provided on pages 42 and 43. 

The Non-Executive Directors are key to this process, providing 
feedback based on their different backgrounds, experience 
and skills and with the benefit of having a degree of 
distance from the process by which initial proposals are 
developed. Active and robust debate of proposals with the 
Non-Executive Directors enables new perspectives to be 
considered and ensures that the ambitions and actions of 
management are subject to challenging oversight.

The Board sets the strategic direction of the Group, taking 
account of factors such as the external environment and 
trends, the resources and existing challenges of the business, 
opportunities and risks. 

In the last year the Board has implemented an additional 
step in the strategy process designed to capture the inputs 
of the Board earlier in the development of the strategy and 
three year plan. 

The Board takes time annually to review the existing 
strategy and to refresh the agreed approach, priorities 
and expectations. To inform and provide context for its 
consideration and debate of management’s strategic 
proposals, the Board receives relevant reports and 
background presentations from both internal and 
external parties. 

Having set the strategic priorities, the Board monitors and 
incentivises delivery of these objectives (whether short or 
long-term) on a continual basis, regularly reviewing the 
controls and resources that are in place, the risks faced by 
the business and how those risks are managed. 

Separate reports by the Board’s three main Committees – 
the Audit & Risk Committee, Remuneration Committee and 
Nomination Committee – are provided on pages 48 to 73. 

The Retail Board is supported by other specific operational 
committees within the business which help ensure that 
strategic actions are disseminated and managed, that 
progress and issues are appropriately reported and 
escalated and that management are properly accountable 
for the performance of their areas of responsibility.

Further details of the different roles performed by the Chief 
Executive and the Chairman are provided on the Group’s 
website www.mccollsplc.co.uk/leadership.

The Chairman is responsible for leadership of the 
Board and ensuring the Board is effective in all 
aspects of its role
Specific roles have been delegated to the Chairman. In the 
year the Chairman worked closely with the Chief Executive 
on the appointment of the new Chief Financial Officer. He is 
responsible for the operation of the Board and for leading 
the Group’s governance. This includes setting the Board 
agenda and leading the Board’s discussions and decision-
making. In addition, the Chairman’s role is to actively 
promote a culture of openness and debate by facilitating 
the effective contribution of the Independent Non-Executive 
Directors. He is available to discuss matters with shareholders 
and is responsible for ensuring that the Board is kept well 
informed about shareholder views. In order to assess the 
effectiveness of the Board and Committees, the Chairman 
leads the annual evaluation process. Further details of the 
Board evaluation are provided on page 47. The Chairman’s 
performance is appraised by the Non-Executives who, led 
by the Senior Independent Director, meet in his absence 
annually to discuss this.

Our Non-Executive Directors constructively challenge 
and help develop McColl’s strategy
Our shareholders have entrusted the Board with promoting 
the long-term success of the Company, whilst remaining true 
to the culture and values that we have set for the business. 
The Board does this by establishing a range of short and long-
term objectives, monitoring and challenging progress made 
towards attaining them and incentivising behaviours that are 
likely to result in sustainable achievement of our vision for the 
business. All of this must be achieved without adopting an 
inappropriate approach to risk and risk management that 
could jeopardise enterprise value.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Composition, Succession  
and Evaluation

The McColl’s Board has a strong balance of skills, 
experience, independence and knowledge of 
the business
We made changes to the Board’s composition, and that of 
its Committees, in 2017 in order to enhance the collective 
skills, experience and knowledge, and also address the 
independence issues of the Board and its Committees. 
Apart from the announcement that Simon Fuller was leaving 
the business the Board structure has been stable.

Details of the experience, background and skills of individual 
Directors can be found on pages 40 to 41.

Diversity in all its forms is something that the Board welcomes. 
Ultimately diversity brings different perspectives to our 
debates and ensures that, as a Board, we are considering 
matters from a variety of angles. In particular, the balance 
of skills, experience and qualifications of the Board and its 
Committees and the mix of different backgrounds is of great 
importance to the effectiveness of our strategic leadership 
and our governance arrangements.

45

Corporate governance report: Composition, Succession and Evaluation continued

Our Board recruitment processes are formal, rigorous 
and transparent
Our policy is not to set a quota or target for Board diversity 
but we are fully committed to transparent and robust 
practices to identify the individual best suited to any 
vacancy. Recruitment is based on an assessment of the 
skills, experience, qualifications and other attributes sought 
and we support this principle being applied throughout 
the organisation. Further details of our approach to issues 
of diversity and, in particular, support for women within the 
business, can be found within the Nomination Committee 
report on page 50 and in relation to our wider organisation, 
on page 30.

For our Board recruitment activity during the year, the 
recruitment of a Chief Financial Officer to replace Simon 
Fuller, we engaged an external firm, Redgrave Partners. 
They helped to ensure we searched a wide pool of potential 
candidates and assessed them against objective criteria 
in order to identify someone with the appropriate skills. 
Further details about this process, which was led by our 
Nomination Committee, are provided on page 49.

Our Directors should dedicate sufficient time 
to their responsibilities
The commitment of our Directors to their roles, including 
the time commitment of our Non-Executive Directors, is a 
crucial factor in ensuring that our skilled Board is able to lead 
the business effectively to build sustainable value for our 
shareholders. Non-Executive Directors’ letters of appointment 
define their duties and, taking account of these, the 
Nomination Committee has reviewed the time commitment 
required of our Non-Executive Directors. Further details 
regarding this can be found on pages 48 to 49. 

The number of meetings attended by our Directors 
does not fully reflect their involvement in the business as, 
between meetings, they are regularly involved in other 
activities. Such activities include meetings and calls with 
management and external advisers, shareholder dialogue 
and background reading. However, formal/scheduled 
meeting attendance statistics, set out below, can provide 
an indication of the degree of commitment.

New Directors receive a formal induction and ongoing 
development activities apply to the whole Board
The talents of our Board members can be put to best use 
when we ensure that they are properly informed. All Directors 
need to be kept up to date about the business including 
trends and developments in the market, changes in the 
regulatory environment and other factors. 

This need particularly arises on appointment and, 
accordingly, all new Directors undergo a formal induction 
process that is described on page 50. However, Directors 
also need ongoing development in order to perform their 
duties as well as possible. As a Board we recognise this 
ongoing requirement and seek to identify and address these 
needs through a variety of individual and group activities 
such as in-depth board briefings, store and site visits and 
presentations by external advisers.

Attendance at meetings

Angus Porter
Jonathan Miller
Simon Fuller
Dave Thomas
Georgina Harvey
Sharon Brown
Jens Hofma

Board

Audit & Risk1

Remuneration2

Nomination

9/9
8/9
9/9
9/9
8/9
9/9
9/9

–
–
–
–
5/5
5/5
5/5

6/6
–
–
–
6/6
6/6
6/6

3/3
3/3
–
–
3/3
3/3
3/3

1  Angus Porter, Jonathan Miller, Simon Fuller and Dave Thomas attended meetings of the Audit and Risk Committee by invitation.

2  Jonathan Miller, Simon Fuller and Dave Thomas attended meetings of the Remuneration Committee by invitation.

46  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

All Directors are subject to annual re-election
The re-election of the Directors is considered annually by 
the Nomination Committee in advance of the Company’s 
Annual General Meeting. A recommendation for re-election 
is not automatic but is dependent upon the Nomination 
Committee being satisfied that the contribution of each 
Director warrants being proposed.

For the Annual General Meeting to be held on 3 April 2019, 
following an assessment of individual performance, all 
Directors are unanimously recommended by the Board for 
re-election, with the exception of Robbie Bell who, having 
been appointed to the Board on 17 January 2019, will 
stand for election by shareholders in accordance with the 
Company’s Articles of Association. Biographical details for 
the Directors are provided on pages 40 and 41 and further 
details accompany the notice of Annual General Meeting, 
including the reasons the proposed re-election of each 
Director has been agreed by the Board.

Arrangements are in place to provide Directors with 
good quality information in a timely manner
Directors, and in particular Non-Executive Directors who 
are not involved in the business on a day-to-day basis, must 
receive high quality, relevant information in a timely manner 
if they are to be able to make appropriate decisions for 
the business. Meeting agendas need to prioritise salient 
matters and ensure that the Board is considering the right 
issues at appropriate times. Reports must be thorough so 
that Directors arrive at meetings well briefed and ready to 
dedicate the valuable time the Board have together to 
challenging and testing rationales, risks and alternatives, for 
example, as opposed to seeking background information 
and facts that could readily have been addressed in the 
original papers. The Company Secretary plays a key role at 
McColl’s in ensuring that this is the case. Rachel Peat FCIS 
was appointed Company Secretary in November 2018.

The Directors of any business can face difficult issues from 
time to time and it is important that they always feel they 
are able to address those issues with the appropriate 
knowledge and advice at their disposal. Accordingly, all 
Directors, having notified the Chairman in the first instance, 
are able to take independent professional advice at the 
Company’s expense if they feel such advice is necessary 
in the furtherance of their duties. During 2018, no Director 
felt it necessary to take such individual advice. They also 
have access to the advice and services of the Company 
Secretary, who is responsible for advising the Board, through 
the Chairman, on all governance matters, and who is also 
available to any Director who wishes to seek their counsel.

A Board evaluation has been conducted
As agreed last year, the Board and Committee evaluation 
for 2018 was conducted internally using a questionnaire 
approach followed up with discussions. The evaluation 
concluded that the Board was effective, however it identified 
some areas for continuing improvement, such as a greater 
focus on succession planning and talent management and 
the need to have an even longer term view on strategy.

The feedback from those discussions was reviewed by the 
Board and the committees during the year in order to assess 
progress since the last evaluation and to identify any further 
enhancements that can be made.

The Board wish to develop and enhance the opportunities 
available for Non-Executive Directors to engage with 
colleagues and are continuing to assess how we can do this 
looking for a range of ways in which we can listen to and 
learn from the people who make McColl’s a success.

As part of the evaluation process, the Senior Independent 
Director led an evaluation of the Chairman’s performance, 
after which it was concluded that he continues to provide 
effective leadership of the Board. 

Board evaluation process

Internally facilitated

Completion 
of questionnaire

Collation 
and reporting 
of results

Individual 
discussions 
with Chairman

Discussion of 
findings and 
update of 
action plan

47

Corporate governance report: Composition, Succession and Evaluation continued
Nomination Committee report

“ Our balance of skills, experience, 

qualifications and diversity remains 
appropriate to the strategic ambitions 
of the business.”

Angus Porter
Nomination Committee Chairman

Dear Shareholder
On behalf of the Nomination Committee, I am pleased to 
present our report for 2018.

Attendance at Nomination Committee meetings during the 
year is indicated in the table below. Three meetings were 
held during the year.

Committee composition and effectiveness
The Nomination Committee comprises myself as Chairman, 
together with three Independent Non-Executive Directors 
and the Chief Executive. The Committee is actively 
supported by the Company Secretary.

As part of the Board’s performance evaluation which 
conducted during the year, the Nomination Committee also 
reviewed its own performance. The results of this exercise will 
continue to shape the future activities of the Committee. 

Meeting 
attendance

Angus Porter
Chairman of the Board 
(considered independent on appointment)

Sharon Brown 
Nomination Committee Member
Independent Non-Executive Director

Georgina Harvey
Nomination Committee Member
Senior Independent Director

Jens Hofma
Nomination Committee Member
Independent Non-Executive Director

Jonathan Miller
Chief Executive

48  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

The Nomination Committee’s responsibilities 
and activities
The Nomination Committee’s responsibilities, which are set 
out in full in the Committee’s terms of reference (available 
from www.mccollsplc.co.uk/committees), and the activities 
through which the Committee has discharged those 
responsibilities, are explored in more detail below.

During the year it was necessary to start the search for 
a Chief Financial Officer following the resignation of 
Simon Fuller in July 2018, a process led by the Committee. 
Redgrave Partners were selected as the executive selection 
agent. Redgrave Partners are signatories to the Voluntary 
Code of Conduct for Executive Search Firms which sets out 
best practice in relation to addressing gender diversity in 
executive recruitment. 

The key matters considered at each of the Committee’s 
meetings during the year are summarised in the 
following table.

Composition of the Board and its Committees
The composition of our Board is fully compliant with the 
Code’s higher standard of independence requirements that 
apply to FTSE 350 companies. 

The Committee regularly reviews the composition of the 
Board and its Committees to provide assurance that our 
balance of skills, experience, qualifications and diversity 
remains appropriate to the strategic ambitions of the 
business and the challenges it faces.

Performance Evaluation
As well as reviewing its terms of reference during the year, the 
Committee also considered its performance and reviewed 
the outcomes of the Board evaluation process as a whole. 
The Board had an external evaluation in 2017 facilitated by 
Deloitte. This year the evaluation was conducted internally. 
The Board currently intends to conduct the 2019 evaluation 
internally, on the basis that the 2018 evaluation revealed no 
material issues requiring independent assessment.

Meeting date

Key agenda items

Feb

Oct

Nov

•  review of Non-Executive Directors independence
•  consideration of suitability of Directors for re-election at the Annual General Meeting
•  performance evaluation

•  recruitment of Chief Financial Officer 
•  review of Board Committee composition
•  review of the Board and committee evaluation process

•  review of Directors’ conflict of interest authorisations
•  review of Non-Executive Directors’ time commitment
•  review of Nomination Committee terms of reference
•  agreement on future focus on succession planning and talent
•  review of the balance of the Board

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Our Non-Executive Directors’ key skills

2

2

3

Areas of
Experience

4

2

2

Finance
Strategy

Operations
Retail

Multi-site business
Consumer brands

Independence, interests and commitment
The Committee is responsible for reviewing, at least 
annually, the independence of Board members, Directors’ 
potential conflicts of interest, the re-election of Directors at 
the Company’s Annual General Meeting and Directors’ 
time commitment. 

The time commitments required of Non-Executive Directors 
are set out in their letters of engagement and are 25–30 
days per year for the Chairman and 15–20 days per year 
for other Non-Executive Directors. However, a review by the 
Nomination Committee recognised that an additional five 
days per annum are required in order for the Chairmen of the 
Audit & Risk and Remuneration Committees to fully perform 
their roles in addition to their other duties. 

The Committee reviewed all Directors’ interests and 
concluded that conflicts of interest have been appropriately 
disclosed and authorised. Following the Committee’s 
recommendations on these matters, the Board has 
confirmed that it considers all Non-Executive Directors to be 
independent and has proposed all Directors for re-election 
at the Company’s Annual General Meeting to be held on 
3 April 2019. 

49

Corporate governance report: Composition, Succession and Evaluation continued
Nomination Committee report

Induction and Board development
The Director induction is a formal process that involves 
providing background information about the business and its 
regulatory environment through, for example, the sharing of 
reports and governance documents. Face-to-face meetings 
are arranged with other Directors, key personnel within the 
business and its advisers and site visits are also undertaken. 
The last Non-Executive Director to go through the induction 
process was Jens Hofma when he joined the Board in 2017. 
More recently Robbie Bell, who joined the business in January 
2019 has gone through the induction process, together 
with a period of handover with Simon Fuller. The process is 
considered to be adequate. 

The ongoing development of Board members is also a priority 
and regular in-depth reviews are undertaken to ensure that 
the Non-Executive Directors have a full understanding of the 
business, specific functional strategies and projects, changes 
to the regulatory environment and market developments. 
Additional development activities are planned over the 
coming months including various site visits, attendance at our 
annual colleague and supplier conference and an update 
on the evolving governance landscape for listed businesses.

Succession planning, talent management and diversity
There is a Group colleague plan which addresses issues 
including succession within the business, the identification 
and nurturing of talent, and the diversity and inclusion 
agenda. This is an ongoing area of focus.

The Board and Nomination Committee are committed 
to ensuring that inclusion and diversity, including gender 
diversity, are fully supported at Board level and throughout 
the business. We recognise that an organisation that 
embraces difference will benefit from the range of 
perspectives brought by variety of background and other 
influences. Accordingly, all appointments are based upon 
an assessment of the skills, qualifications and experience 
of individuals. It is not the Board’s policy to establish a quota 
of women for appointment.

A number of wider initiatives have been established within 
the business during the year to ensure that we support our 
colleagues to achieve their aspirations and potential. We are 
particularly pleased with the progress that has been made in 
appointing more women to senior management positions.

Some of these are aimed at ensuring that we provide good 
support to women, whatever stage they are at in their 
life and career, to succeed in the workplace. More detail 
about our colleague engagement and initiatives and 
plans to support and develop colleagues can be found on 
pages 29 to 31.

As a business, McColl’s is a significant employer of women. 
Like many other organisations, at McColl’s women are under-
represented at senior management levels but it is good news 
that more than half our stores are managed by women. 
A focus group was run to learn from the real experiences 
of our female colleagues, and we have been analysing 
the data gathered for our gender pay gap reporting to 
understand better where efforts need to be more focused. 

Details of our gender pay gap are provided on page 30.

This report was approved by the Nomination Committee 
and signed on its behalf:

Angus Porter
Nomination Committee Chairman

Board Diversity

2

Gender
Diversity

Executive
vs
Independent

4

3

5

Female
Male

Executive
Independent Non-Executive*

*  The Chairman was deemed 

independent on appointment.

50  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Our Board is responsible for determining the principal 
risks that it considers to be acceptable in order to 
achieve McColl’s strategic objectives
The Board recognises that effective risk management is 
essential to the long-term success of the business and to 
protecting shareholder value. It has overall responsibility for 
the Group’s system of risk management and internal controls 
and for ensuring those systems are effective. Although no 
system can provide absolute assurance, our systems are 
considered adequate to appropriately manage the risk 
of failure to achieve business objectives and to provide 
reasonable protection from material misstatement or loss. 

Our Board has established formal and transparent 
arrangements for considering how corporate reporting, 
risk management and internal control principles should 
be applied and how an appropriate relationship with the 
external Auditor can be maintained
The Board has established an Audit & Risk Committee 
comprising Independent Non-Executive Directors, including 
individuals who have experience relevant to the retail sector. 
This Committee is chaired by Sharon Brown, who has recent 
and relevant financial experience, and who has provided a 
separate report on behalf of the Audit & Risk Committee on 
pages 52 to 56. 

The McColl’s approach to risk and risk management is 
described on pages 34 to 38 where a summary of our key risks 
and how they are mitigated is also provided. These principal 
risks have been agreed following robust and regular 
assessment. They include the risks that could threaten our 
business model, performance, solvency or liquidity.

The Audit & Risk Committee Report describes the 
membership, responsibilities and activities of the Committee 
and how it has discharged its duties during the year.

Audit, Risk and Internal control

The McColl’s Board recognises its duty to present a fair, 
balanced and understandable assessment of the Group’s 
position and prospects
The Annual Report and Accounts, together with other 
published information, provide important disclosures 
that enable shareholders and other readers to assess the 
performance, strategy and business model of the Company. 
The Group has thorough assurance processes in place in 
respect of the preparation, verification and approval of 
periodic financial reports, including:

•  a system of financial and other internal controls,

• 

the involvement of qualified, professional employees with 
an appropriate level of experience (both in our finance 
team and throughout the business),

•  a transparent process to ensure full disclosure of 

information to the external Auditor,

•  access to external help and advice on highly 

technical subjects,

•  comprehensive review and, where appropriate, 

challenge from appropriate senior managers and 
Executive Directors,

•  oversight by the Audit & Risk Committee as described in 

more detail on pages 52 to 56.

These processes provide reasonable assurance to the Board 
when they approve the Annual Report and Accounts and 
other published documents that the disclosures they contain, 
including the viability and going concern statements, are not 
misleading and are sufficient for users of those documents to 
form a reasonable view of the business and its prospects. 

Safer for Stores
Our Safer for Stores programme is designed to help 
colleagues manage security risks. Across a large estate 
of stores, there are inevitably incidents and accidents. 
We recognise we have a duty of care to understand 
and address the risks within the business in order to 
ensure, as far as possible, we keep our colleagues and 
customers safe.

51

Corporate governance report: Audit, Risk and Internal control continued
Audit & Risk Committee report

“ As highlighted last year,  
we are in the process of  
an audit tender for 2019.”

Sharon Brown
Audit & Risk Committee Chair

The composition of the Audit & Risk Committee and the skills 
we collectively bring to our work, the ways in which we have 
performed our role, the key matters that we have considered 
and the recommendations that we have made to the Board 
are described in the remainder of this report. 

Sharon Brown
Audit & Risk Committee Chair

Dear Shareholder
I am pleased to present, on behalf of the Board, the Audit & 
Risk Committee’s formal report.

It has been a challenging year for the business but our 
strategy for the future remains on track (see page 17 in the 
Strategic Report). We must remain mindful of the risks and 
pitfalls that a developing business can face and ensure 
that controls are sufficiently robust and that behaviours are 
appropriate. The Audit & Risk Committee leads the Board’s 
focus on matters of risk, as well as on integrity of the Group’s 
financial reporting, and has been busy during the year in 
ensuring that we discharge our responsibilities carefully. 
The Committee’s report which follows provides information 
on how we have done so.

As highlighted in last year’s Annual Report, we are in the 
process of an audit tender. Deloitte LLP was first appointed 
as the Group’s auditor in 2006. At that point the Group 
was a private business but following the Group’s listing in 
2014, the Group is now subject to regulatory requirements 
on audit re-tender. Although the Group’s external audit 
arrangements need to be re-tendered no later than 2024, the 
Audit Committee recommended a tender for the 2019 audit. 
Deloitte LLP will be recommended for re-appointment as 
auditor until the tender process is complete and a successor 
is identified, at which point Deloitte will resign as auditor to 
the Group.

52  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Audit & Risk Committee’s activities
Given its extensive remit, it is vital that the Audit & 
Risk Committee organises its time so as to cover all its 
responsibilities regularly. Agendas are planned, with 
the support of the Company Secretary, to ensure that 
the responsibilities set out in the Committee’s terms of 
reference are fully discharged at the most appropriate 
time in the annual calendar. For example, the Audit & Risk 
Committee conducted a full review of the risk register and 
risk management framework in advance of the Board’s 
strategy meeting in order to inform the Board’s consideration 
of strategic plans. 

Planning the year ahead also helps ensure that less time-
critical matters can be spread evenly across meetings so 
that adequate time can be provided at meetings for full 
discussion. The way in which the Audit & Risk Committee 
divided its time during 2018 is summarised in the table of 
key agenda items on page 54.

Committee composition and effectiveness 
As part of the Board’s performance evaluation, the Audit & 
Risk Committee also reviewed its own performance. The Audit 
& Risk Committee has confirmed that the collective financial 
and sector experience of its members is considered to be 
appropriate, relevant and sufficiently recent to enable the 
Committee to discharge its responsibilities in full. 

Meeting 
attendance

Sharon Brown
Audit & Risk Committee Chairman
Independent Non-Executive Director
Member of the Chartered Institute 
of Management Accountants
Previous experience as a Finance Director
Chairs the Audit Committees of a number 
of other companies

Georgina Harvey
Audit & Risk Committee Member
Senior Independent Director

Jens Hofma
Audit & Risk Committee Member  
Independent Non-Executive Director

The biography of each member of the Audit & Risk 
Committee can be found on page 41.

Audit & Risk Committee’s responsibilities
The Board has delegated a number of responsibilities to 
the Audit & Risk Committee in order to provide the Board 
and Shareholders with assurance that key financial and risk 
matters are being overseen and challenged by Independent 
Non-Executive Directors who are not involved on a day-to-
day basis with the management or control of those functions. 
The Committee oversees financial reporting, external audit 
and internal controls, and reviews factors that influence 
the effectiveness of the external Auditor, for example their 
independence. The Audit & Risk Committee is responsible 
for making recommendations to the Board on a number 
of different matters including on the appointment of the 
Company’s external Auditor and approval of financial 
disclosures, including the Annual Report and Accounts 
and Interim Financial Statements. 

In addition, the Committee has responsibility for oversight 
of risk and risk management systems, in the absence of a 
separate risk committee. It reviews the Company’s relevant 
key policies to ensure that wrong-doing such as bribery and 
fraud is, as far as possible, prevented and, where it occurs, 
is detected and lessons are learned. As part of this, the 
Committee is responsible for ensuring that there are effective 
arrangements in place to enable colleagues to speak up 
in confidence if they become aware of any wrong-doing 
occurring within the business, including any conduct that 
is illegal. 

The Committee undertook a thorough review of its terms of 
reference during the year and adopted several changes to 
ensure continued compliance with best practice. A copy 
of the Committee’s terms of reference is available on the 
McColl’s website at www.mccollsplc.co.uk/committees.

53

Corporate governance report: Audit, Risk and Internal control continued
Audit & Risk Committee report

Meeting date

Key agenda items

•  draft Annual Report and Accounts 2017 and related matters
•  new Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) system

Jan

Feb

Jul

Oct

Nov

•  year-end external audit outcomes
•  Annual Report and Accounts 2017 and related matters
•  external Auditor independence, objectivity and reappointment
•  principal risk disclosures
•  Committee performance evaluation
•  consideration of Group guarantee for subsidiary companies

•  half year external review outcomes
•  half year 2018 announcement and related matters
•  risk register 
•  Committee terms of reference

•  early draft external audit plan 
•  IFRS 16 (lease accounting) project update 
•  risk register as background to the Board’s strategy review
•  policy on provision of non-audit services by the Auditor
•  policy on related party transactions

•  year-end external audit plan
•  key accounting policies
•  financial and internal controls
•  risk management systems
•  consideration of the requirement for an internal audit function 
•  compliance, fraud, whistleblowing, bribery incidents review
•  policies on speaking up in confidence, anti-bribery and employment of former employees 

of the external Auditor

Making sure the Audit & Risk Committee is well informed
The information that is provided to the Audit & Risk 
Committee is key to ensuring that Committee members 
are sufficiently well informed to enable them to form a 
reasonable view of the matters they are considering. 
Written reports are provided in advance and meetings are 
attended, by invitation, by the Chairman, Executive Directors, 
external Audit Partner and others so that the written reports 
can be discussed and challenged. 

Regular opportunity is also provided for the Committee 
to meet with the Auditor in the absence of management. 

Between meetings the Chairman of the Audit & Risk 
Committee receives regular updates from the Chief 
Financial Officer relating to Audit & Risk Committee matters 
and responsibilities.

Another source of assurance to the Audit & Risk Committee 
could come from an internal audit function which the 
business does not currently have. The Audit & Risk Committee 
reviews annually whether it would be appropriate for an 
internal audit function to be established. During the year 
the Audit & Risk Committee received a detailed report on 
the existing controls within the business and, after discussion, 
concluded that it was not necessary to establish an internal 
audit function at this stage. This decision will be reviewed 
again in 2019.

After each Audit & Risk Committee meeting, actions 
are clearly identified, tracked and reported back to the 
Committee as progress is made in completing them. 
The Committee Chairman reports to the Board on 
the main items discussed at each meeting, including 
recommendations on any items requiring further 
consideration and decision by the Board. The Board 
also receives copies of the Committee’s full minutes.

54  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Auditor re-appointment
The decision whether to recommend re-appointment of the 
external Auditor is reviewed annually. 

Deloitte was first appointed as the Group’s auditor in 2006. 
At that point the Group was a private business but, following 
the Group’s listing in 2014, the Group is subject to regulatory 
requirements on audit re-tender. Although not required 
to tender until 2024, as reported last year, the Audit & Risk 
Committee has commenced a tender for the 2019 audit. 
This process is underway, the results will be reported to 
shareholders in due course. It is recommended that Deloitte 
be re-appointed until such time as a successor is identified.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Significant accounting judgements and uncertainties 
considered by the committee during the year
Summarised below are the most significant issues considered 
by the Committee in respect of these financial statements 
and how these issues were addressed. Having reviewed 
the audit plan initially and considered and discussed the 
draft financial statements and disclosures in the light of 
the external Auditor’s work and findings, the Audit & Risk 
Committee were satisfied with the significant accounting 
judgements made in preparing them.

Supply Chain Transition
On 31 July 2017 the Group entered into a new wholesale 
supply agreement with Morrisons. Under this agreement 
the business received contract incentives. In addition, as 
a result of the complex launch and transition period after 
the collapse of P&H, the business has received transitional 
support payments.

Treatment of Supplier Income 
Judgement is required on the level of accrued supplier 
income and the profit element recognised for the 
amounts not invoiced or specifically agreed with suppliers. 
Judgement is also required in determining the period over 
which the reduction in cost of sales should be recognised, 
requiring both a detailed understanding of the contractual 
arrangements themselves as well as complete and 
accurate source data to which the arrangements apply. 
As the process of appropriate recognition can involve 
significant manual adjustments, these have the potential for 
inappropriate manipulation.

Non-audit services
The assurance provided by the external audit process 
is key to ensuring confidence in our financial reporting. 
The Audit & Risk Committee therefore regards the continued 
independence of the external Auditor as vitally important. 
The Group has a clear and robust policy relating to the 
provision of non-audit services by the external Auditor. 
The policy was adopted last year and is reviewed annually. 
There are specific services identified that are prohibited 
and may not be provided by the external Auditor in any 
circumstances. These include (but are not limited to) all 
tax services, bookkeeping, payroll, executive recruitment, 
internal audit, internal control and risk management, 
expert services (beyond audit) and valuations. 

Where the external Auditor provides non-audit services 
which are not prohibited, the Audit & Risk Committee 
has established as part of the policy that, other than 
in exceptional circumstances, the total cost of all non-
audit services provided by the external Auditor must not 
exceed 70% of the cost of statutory audit services (based 
on the average of the last three years). Audit and non-
audit fees are shown here and disclosed in note 6 to 
the financial statements. 

The non-audit fees paid during the year related to an interim 
review, turnover certificates and banking covenants.

42

Audit and
non-audit
fees

275

Audit fees (£’000)
Non-audit fees (£’000)

Included within the audit fee total for the year is an amount 
of £51,000 that is deemed to be non-recurring in nature.

55

Corporate governance report: Audit, Risk and Internal control continued
Audit & Risk Committee report

Arrangements for speaking up in confidence 
Consistent with the McColl’s values, the Group seeks 
to operate according to the highest ethical standards. 
An important aspect of this is ensuring that, if a colleague 
becomes concerned about suspected wrong-doing 
within the business, they are aware of how they can report 
their concerns, in confidence, so that the matter can be 
investigated and dealt with appropriately. The Committee 
considers the policy for colleagues to speak up in confidence 
and the procedures that support it to be appropriate for 
the size and scale of the business with no further changes 
deemed necessary currently. The Committee will continue 
to review this at least annually.

Conclusion
The Audit & Risk Committee has advised the Board that 
the processes in place to ensure that the Annual Report 
and Accounts, when taken as a whole, is fair, balanced 
and understandable, are adequate. The Committee is 
also satisfied that appropriate governance continues to 
be applied to the Company’s systems of internal control, 
risk management and other compliance areas.

Approved by the Audit & Risk Committee and signed 
on its behalf:

Sharon Brown
Audit & Risk Committee Chairman

Remuneration

Our approach to Executive Directors’ remuneration 
is designed to support strategy and promote the  
long-term sustainable success of the business
The Directors’ Remuneration report on pages 57 to 73 
describes in detail our approach to Executive Directors’ 
remuneration, the different elements that make up their 
remuneration package, the targets on which performance 
elements are based, and termination arrangements. 
One of the key factors of which the Remuneration 
Committee takes account when it is considering potential 
changes to Executive remuneration, is the pay and 
conditions that prevail across the wider group and industry.

Non-Executive Directors are paid a fee that reflects the 
time commitment required of them and their responsibilities. 
Non-Executive Directors do not receive any performance-
related benefits. There have been no changes to the fees 
of Non-Executive Directors during the year. 

There is a formal and transparent procedure for 
developing Executive remuneration and for determining 
individual packages
The Remuneration Committee, comprised wholly of 
Independent Non-Executive Directors, is responsible for 
setting our Executive team’s remuneration, including 
performance conditions, and for determining the extent 
to which relevant targets have been met. It consults with 
shareholders, in particular when changes are proposed, 
and did so prior to the 2018 Annual General Meeting 
at which a revised remuneration policy was approved. 
The Remuneration Committee’s duties are set out in full 
in the Committee’s terms of reference (available from 
www.mccollsplc.co.uk/committees). The Directors’ 
Remuneration report on pages 57 to 73 describes in more 
detail how the Remuneration Committee discharges 
these duties. 

Impairment accounting
Given the difficult trading faced by the Group over the year, 
there is increased judgement in the carrying value of the 
Group’s stores and consideration for impairment indicators. 
In addition, the Group holds a significant value of goodwill 
generated through acquisitions of businesses, individual 
and groups of stores. The goodwill balance is highly material. 
The value of stores and goodwill is supported by forecasts 
of future cash flows of the businesses. There are inherent 
risks within these forecasts due to uncertainties as a result 
of changing industry and economic conditions.

Presentation and classification of results
In reviewing the presentation of adjusted profits, the 
Committee fully recognise the importance of ensuring that 
the rationale applied in identifying items for adjustment 
is clear, appropriate and consistent with the Group’s 
accounting policies. The most significant items of adjustment 
are identified in the Financial Review on page 23 and in the 
Auditor’s Report on page 85. The Audit & Risk Committee 
challenged and debated the appropriateness of each 
of these significant adjusting items with Management 
and sought an explanation of the judgement made and 
confirmation that a consistent Group policy, which also 
took account of market norms to ensure the treatment was 
consistent with best practice and the practice of others in 
our industry, was applied to the treatment of such items. 
The Committee was also mindful of the need for adequate 
disclosure. The inclusion of relevant defined terms in the 
glossary is helpful in this respect.

Going Concern 
The Committee has considered going concern by reviewing 
long-term forecasts, taking into account the revised banking 
facilities available to the Group.  When considering the 
possible impacts of Brexit (details of which are contained in 
the Principal risks and uncertainties section on page 38),  a 
number of scenarios have been modelled as detailed in 
the Going concern statement on page 77. The Committee 
challenged the assessment performed, including the severity 
of the downside scenarios and the reasonableness of the 
mitigating actions, to ensure that sufficient headroom still 
remained when applying these sensitivities.

56  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Directors’ remuneration report 
Annual statement

Georgina Harvey
Remuneration Committee Chair

Dear shareholder
I am pleased to present the Directors’ Remuneration Report 
for the financial period ended 25 November 2018. This report 
has been prepared in accordance with the Large and 
Medium-sized Companies and Group (Accounts and 
Reports) Regulations 2013, as amended, and the principles 
of the prevailing UK Corporate Governance Code.

The report is split into three sections:

•  This Annual Statement summarising the work of the 

Committee, our approach to remuneration and an ‘at a 
glance’ summary of Executive Director remuneration; 
•  The Directors’ Remuneration policy, which sets out the 

current shareholder approved policy; and

•  The Annual Report on Remuneration, which sets out the 
remuneration arrangements and incentive outcomes for 
the year under review and how the Committee intends 
to implement the Policy in 2019.

There will be two remuneration-related votes at the 2019 
AGM, the first being the advisory vote on the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report (the Remuneration Policy was 
approved by shareholders at the 2018 AGM Policy so 
need not be approved this year as there are no changes). 
Secondly, a resolution will be tabled for shareholders to 
approve the deferred bonus plan rules which were approved 
in principle last year.

Strategic background
In the last 12 months, the supply chain disruption, which 
has resulted in the need to accelerate the rollout of our 
new supply agreement, has created significant challenges. 
This has impacted our LFL sales performance as well as put 
pressure on gross margin, resulting in lower profits for the 52 
weeks ended 25 November 2018. Going forwards, continued 
cost pressures and uncertainty for consumers is likely to 
require us to demonstrate further competitive retail pricing.

Pay and Performance for 2018
As explained elsewhere in this Annual Report and Accounts, 
2018 was a difficult year for the business. As such, no bonus 
will be payable to the Executive Directors in respect of the 
2018 performance year and the LTIP awards granted in 2016 
will lapse in full in 2019. While three-year TSR performance to 
25 November 2018 resulted in part of these awards vesting 
(there was no vesting against EPS targets), the Remuneration 

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Committee exercised its discretion and determined that 
there should be no vesting in respect of the 2016 awards in 
light of recent share price performance.

Implementation of the Remuneration Policy  
for Executive Directors for 2019
No changes will be made to base salary, benefit or pension 
provision for 2019. The maximum bonus opportunity continues 
to be set at 100% of base salary. For 2019, 70% of the annual 
bonus will be determined by performance against operating 
profit targets, 10% will be determined by performance against 
revenue targets and 20% will be determined by strategic 
performance targets. This is to ensure that the Executive team 
will be focussed not only on delivering the current year’s 
financial targets but also on establishing the foundations 
needed for sustainable future growth. These targets are 
currently regarded as commercially sensitive although 
disclosure of the targets and performance against the targets 
will be set out in the 2019 Directors’ Remuneration Report.

Given the current share price volatility and noting the 
recent appointment of our new Chief Financial Officer, the 
Remuneration Committee considers it appropriate to delay 
the normal LTIP grant for 2019 for a period of time. LTIP award 
levels will be reviewed in advance of the awards being 
granted although it should be noted that the Chief Executive 
and Chief Operating Officer’s LTIP award levels are expected 
to be materially lower than the normal 150% of salary grant 
level to reflect the recent share price decline (noting that 
the Chief Financial Officer’s award level of 125% of salary 
was agreed as part of his recruitment package and will 
therefore be honoured, albeit granted later than originally 
envisaged). While the Committee is not in a position to agree 
and disclose the performance targets at this point, they 
will be appropriately challenging and fully disclosed in the 
RNS published shortly after the grant date and in next year’s 
Directors’ Remuneration Report. A two-year holding period 
will apply to any LTIP awards granted in 2019.

Yours sincerely

Georgina Harvey
Remuneration Committee Chair

57

Directors’ remuneration report continued 

 Remuneration at a glance

The following is a summary of the key components of Executive Directors’ remuneration 
and their single figure total remuneration for the 52 weeks ended 25 November 2018.

Key components

Single figure remuneration of Executive Directors (£’000)

Basic salary

Pension benefits

Other benefits

Fixed pay

To attract and retain talent 
of the right calibre and with 
the ability to contribute to 
strategy, by ensuring basic 
salaries are competitive in 
the relevant talent market.

e
s
o
p
u
P

r

To provide post-retirement 
benefits for participants 
in a cost-efficient manner.

To provide a competitive 
and balanced package 
of benefits.

Annual bonus

Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP)

Variable pay

e To incentivise focus on achievement of 
s
o
p
u
P

stretch profit targets as well as the delivery 
of key strategic priorities for the year.

r

To align the interests of Executives with 
shareholders in growing the value of the 
business over the long term.

77%

59%

17% 6% £591

14%

6%

9%

12%

£750

82%

12%

6%

£356

61%

9%

5%

9%

17% £469

83%

12% 5%

£348

64%

10% 4%

10%

13% £427

Jonathan Miller

2018

2017

Dave Thomas

2018

2017

Simon Fuller

2018

2017

Basic salary
Pension benefit
Other benefits
Single-year variable
Multiple-year variable

These figures are described in more detail on page 68.

58  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Directors’ remuneration policy

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

This section of the report sets out the Company’s Directors’ remuneration policy which 
was approved by a binding vote of shareholders at the 2018 AGM. It is intended that the 
policy will apply for the three years from the date of approval.

The Remuneration Committee’s key objective in designing the policy was to ensure that it 
serves the business and its shareholders well by incentivising appropriate behaviours and 
management focus on strategic and financial objectives and by remaining attractive as 
an employer.

Summary Policy table
The key components of the remuneration policy approved by shareholders at the AGM held on 12 April 2018 are described below. The full policy can be found in the 2017 Annual Report.

Basic salary

Pension

To attract and retain talent of the right calibre and with the ability to 
contribute to strategy, by ensuring base salaries are competitive in 
the relevant talent market.

To provide post-retirement benefits for participants in a cost-efficient 
manner.

Other benefits

To provide competitive benefits for each role.

Fixed pay

Basic salaries are reviewed annually, with reference to individual 
performance, experience, market competitiveness, salary increases 
across the group and the position holder’s experience, competence 
and criticality to the performance of the business.

Generally, the case for making any increases is considered annually.

Executive Directors’ salary increases will normally be in line with those 
for the wider employee population. However, larger changes to 
salary may be made where there is a change in role or responsibilities 
or a significant market misalignment.

All the current Executive Directors receive a salary supplement in 
lieu of pension but, in the case of the Chief Financial Officer, his 
supplement is reduced by the amount that is contributed towards his 
participation in the Group’s defined contribution scheme. Any new 
Executive Director would be eligible to participate in that scheme 
(or any replacement scheme) or to receive a salary supplement 
in lieu of pension provision.

Pension contributions vary based on individual circumstances. 
Pension benefits will be capped at 20% of salary, excluding legacy 
arrangements for the current Chief Executive.

Individual and Group performance is taken into account when 
determining appropriate salaries.

None.

Benefits may currently include the provision of a car or car allowance, 
fuel, private medical insurance and life assurance.

Reasonable relocation, travel and subsistence allowances and other 
benefits may be provided based on individual circumstances.

These benefits are set at a level that is comparable 
to market practice.

The Committee retains the discretion to amend benefits in 
exceptional circumstances or in circumstances where factors outside 
of the Group’s control have materially changed (e.g. increases in 
insurance premiums).

None.

e
s
o
p
r
u
P

o
t
k
n

i
l

d
n
a

y
g
e
t

a
r
t
s

n
o
i
t

a
r
e
p
O

m
u
m
x
a
M

i

y
t
i
n
u
t
r
o
p
p
o

e
c
n
a
m
r
o

f
r
e
P

s
c
i
r
t
e
m

59

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ remuneration report continued
Directors’ remuneration policy continued

e
s
o
p
r
u
P

o
t
k
n

i
l

d
n
a

y
g
e
t

a
r
t
s

n
o
i
t

a
r
e
p
O

m
u
m
x
a
M

i

y
t
i
n
u
t
r
o
p
p
o

e
c
n
a
m
r
o

f
r
e
P

s
c
i
r
t
e
m

Annual bonus

Variable pay

Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP)

To focus Executive Directors on achieving stretching profit targets as well as delivering the strategic business 
priorities for the financial period. The partial deferral of bonus into shares is intended to further align 
Directors’ interests with those of shareholders.

To align the interests of Executive Directors with those of shareholders in sustainably growing the value 
of the business over the long term.

Performance measures and targets are set prior to or shortly after the start of the financial period. At the 
end of the financial period, the Remuneration Committee will determine the extent to which the targets 
have been achieved.

The plan provides for annual awards of performance shares to eligible participants. Vesting is based on 
three-year performance. Executive Directors’ vested shares are subject to an additional two-year holding 
period before being released to participants.

One-third of any bonus award will be deferred into shares that must be retained for a period of three years, 
with the remainder paid in cash.

The Committee has discretion to reduce the bonus in the event of serious financial misstatement or 
gross misconduct. In extreme cases of gross misconduct, the Committee may claw back annual bonus 
payments previously made.

The maximum bonus opportunity for Executive Directors is up to 100% of salary.

10% and 50% of maximum will be payable for threshold and on target performance respectively. Stretch 
targets apply to the full award.

The Committee has discretion to reduce any unvested long-term incentive awards (including those in a 
holding period), or to vary the opportunities for future awards, in case of serious financial misstatement or 
gross misconduct. In extreme cases of gross misconduct, the Committee may claw back vested long-term 
incentive awards.

Participants are eligible to receive cash or shares equal to the value of dividends that would have been 
paid over the vesting period on shares that vest.

Awards may be made up to a maximum of 150% of salary in normal circumstances and up to 250% 
in exceptional circumstances.

The majority of the annual bonus will be based on achievement of a stretching profit target. The remainder 
will be based on strategic performance measures, selected annually by the Remuneration Committee to 
reflect other key performance indicators and strategic priorities for the year ahead. The latter is intended to 
ensure that Executive Directors maintain focus not only on current year financial targets, but also on longer-
term strategic goals to drive sustainable growth.

The Committee has discretion to adjust the formulaic bonus outcome downwards (or upwards with 
shareholder consultation) within the limits of the plan, to ensure alignment of pay with the underlying 
performance of the business.

Awards will vest on achievement of financial performance measures, measured over a three-year 
performance period, to include both EPS and TSR. EPS will receive a weighting in the LTIP of at least 50%.

TSR will be measured on a relative basis against a relevant peer group.

Other measures may be considered in future years to help capture the strategic goals of the business and 
may be used in conjunction with these metrics.

Nothing will vest below threshold. 25% of each element will vest for achievement of threshold performance, 
then increase on a straight-line basis to full vesting for achieving stretch performance.

The Committee has discretion to adjust the formulaic LTIP award downwards (or upwards with shareholder 
consultation), within the limits of the plan, to ensure alignment of pay with the underlying performance 
of the business.

60  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Shareholding guidelines

Non-Executive Directors’ fees

To align Directors’ interests with the long-term interests of shareholders.

To reflect the time commitment in preparing for and attending meetings, the duties and responsibilities of the 
role and the contribution expected from the Non-Executive Directors.

Other arrangements

Executive Directors will be required to build up and retain a minimum shareholding in the Company 
at least equal to 200% of basic salary. 

To help Executive Directors achieve the required shareholding levels, some mandatory share deferral 
arrangements have been built into the variable elements of pay. One-third of any future annual 
bonus paid will be subject to mandatory deferral into shares to be held for three years. All share 
options that vest under the LTIP, but which must be held for a further period of two years prior to 
exercise, will count towards achievement of the shareholding guideline.

An all-inclusive annual fee is paid to the Chairman.

An annual base fee is paid to other Non-Executive Directors which is inclusive of their membership (but not 
chairmanship) of all Board Committees. Additional fees are paid to the Chairmen of the Audit & Risk and 
Remuneration Committees and to the Senior Independent Director.

Non-Executive Directors do not participate in any incentive schemes, nor do they receive any pension or other 
benefits (other than reasonable out-of-pocket expenses incurred in the proper performance of their duties).

There is no prescribed individual maximum fee but there is an aggregate limit of £500,000.

None.

None.

e
s
o
p
r
u
P

o
t
k
n

i
l

d
n
a

y
g
e
t

a
r
t
s

n
o
i
t

a
r
e
p
O

m
u
m
x
a
M

i

e
c
n
a
m
r
o

f
r
e
P

y
t
i
n
u
t
r
o
p
p
o

s
c
i
r
t
e
m

61

 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ remuneration report continued
Directors’ remuneration policy continued

Performance measure selection and approach to target setting
Annual bonus targets are selected prior to or shortly after the start of the financial period. 
Operating profit is considered to be the best measure of the Group’s annual financial 
performance and will continue to determine the majority of the annual bonus. The profit 
target is calibrated with reference to the Group’s budget for the upcoming financial period. 

The profit target is supplemented by an element based on further financial and/or strategic 
performance measures which are selected annually to reflect the Group’s key strategic 
priorities for the financial period ahead. No bonus pay-out can be made based upon the 
strategic measures unless the profit target is at least achieved at threshold level.

For the LTIP which incentivises delivery of longer-term success, EPS is considered to be the 
best measure of the Group’s bottom line financial performance over this time frame and will 
always determine the vesting for at least 50% of the overall LTIP award. Relative TSR against an 
appropriate peer group will also be captured to further align the interests of LTIP participants 
with those of shareholders.

Threshold and stretch performance levels under the EPS element of the LTIP are set at the 
start of the three-year performance period. The Remuneration Committee aims to set 
stretching but achievable targets, taking account of a range of reference points, including 
broker forecasts and the Group’s strategic plan. Threshold vesting for the TSR element is set 
at median ranking with the stretch target set at upper quartile. These targets are in line with 
market practice for other listed companies and are expected to capture a range of good to 
excellent performance for the Group.

The Remuneration Committee has established the following performance adjustment 
principles in order for there to be a shared understanding of the process for making 
adjustments to LTIP performance criteria in appropriate circumstances:

a.  the Committee will consider making an adjustment where a change is recognised as a 

Class 1 transaction (as defined by the UKLA Listing Rules);

b.  the Committee would not make an adjustment where the change results in less than a 5% 

impact on EPS; and

Jonathan Miller

Minimum

On-target

Maximum

Robbie Bell

Minimum

On-target

Maximum

Dave Thomas

Minimum

c.  adjustments will be considered between the upper and lower limits defined in a. and b.

On-target

Differences in remuneration policy operated for other employees
Senior management’s remuneration has the same components as set out in the policy, 
being basic salary, annual bonus, pension, life assurance and other benefit provision. 
They may also be invited to participate in the LTIP or alternatively the Company’s share 
option plan. Annual bonus arrangements have the same structure but are subject to lower 
salary multiples, with the potential varying with seniority. Payout arrangements are based on 
specific key performance indicators relevant to each job function and for Senior Managers 
below Board level, part of the Bonus may be deferred. Shareholding guidelines apply to Retail 
Board members.

All colleagues receive a basic salary and all eligible colleagues are automatically invited 
to enrol into a pension scheme. Store Managers participate in a bonus scheme that targets 
specific key performance indicators for their store.

Maximum

Fixed pay
Annual bonus
Long Term Incentive Plan

62  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Other
In addition to the above elements of remuneration, any commitment made prior to, but due 
to be fulfilled after, the approval and implementation of the policy detailed in this report will 
be honoured.

Performance scenarios
The graph below provides estimates of the potential future reward opportunities for Executive 
Directors, and the potential split between the different elements of remuneration under three 
different performance scenarios; ‘Minimum’, ‘Target’ and ‘Maximum’. In these scenarios it 
has been assumed that the incentive arrangements are operated at the maximum level 
permitted under the policy, which for the LTIP will not be the case in 2019, as indicated in 
the Annual Statement on page 57.

Executive Director remuneration scenarios (£’000)

100%

£600

60%

35%

100%

£396

57%

32%

100%

£359

58%

33%

23%

17%

£994

26%

39%

£1,727

25%

18%

£693

27%

41%

£1,246

24%

18%

£615

27%

40%

£1,092

Approach to remuneration for new Director appointments
When recruiting or appointing a new Executive Director, the Remuneration Committee may 
make use of all the existing components of remuneration, as follows:

Component 

Approach

Maximum opportunity

Basic salary

Pension

Other benefits

The basic salaries of new appointees will be determined 
based on the experience and skills of the individual, 
relevant market data and their current basic salary.

New appointees will be entitled to participate in the 
Group’s defined contribution scheme (or any replacement 
scheme) or to receive a salary supplement in lieu of 
pension contributions.

New appointees will be eligible to receive benefits in line 
with the policy which may include (but are not limited to) 
the provision of a company car or car allowance, fuel, 
private medical insurance and life assurance.

20% of basic salary.

Annual bonus

The structure described in the policy table will apply to new 
appointees with the relevant maximum being pro-rated 
to reflect the proportion of employment over the year.

100% of basic salary.

LTIP

New appointees will be granted awards under the LTIP 
on similar terms as other Executives, as described in the 
policy table.

150% of basic salary (250% in 
exceptional circumstances).

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

In determining appropriate remuneration for a new Executive Director, the Committee 
will take into consideration all relevant factors to ensure that arrangements are in the best 
interests of the Group and its shareholders. The Committee may make an award in respect 
of a new appointment to ‘buy out’ incentive arrangements forfeited on leaving a previous 
employer, using Listing Rule 9.4.2 R if necessary. In doing so, the Committee will take account 
of relevant factors including any performance conditions attached to these awards, the 
likelihood of those conditions being met and the proportion of the vesting period remaining. 
The fair value of any buyout will not exceed that of the award being forgone. 

In cases of appointing a new Executive Director by way of internal promotion, the approach 
will be consistent with the policy for external appointees detailed above. Where an individual 
has contractual commitments made prior to their promotion to Executive Director level, the 
Group will continue to honour these arrangements. Incentive opportunities for below Board 
colleagues are no higher than for Executive Directors, but measures may vary.

In recruiting a new Non-Executive Director, the Remuneration Committee will use the policy 
as summarised above.

63

Directors’ remuneration report continued
Directors’ remuneration policy continued

Service contracts and exit payment policy

Non-Executive Directors
The Chairman, Angus Porter, was appointed as a Non-Executive Director on 1 April 2016. 
Georgina Harvey and Sharon Brown were both appointed as Non-Executive Directors on 
7 February 2014 and Jens Hofma was appointed on 1 July 2017. All Non-Executive letters 
of appointment set out the terms of the individual’s appointment and are available for 
inspection at the Company’s registered office and at the Annual General Meeting. They are 
not eligible to participate in the annual bonus or any equity schemes, nor do they receive 
any additional pension or benefits (other than out of pocket expenses directly incurred in the 
performance of their role) on top of their standard fees disclosed. Non-Executive Directors 
have a notice period of one month and receive no compensation on termination.

Executive Directors
On 24 February 2014, Dave Thomas entered into a service agreement with the Company. 
Both Jonathan Miller and Simon Fuller entered service agreements with the Company 
on 1 April 2016. In the case of Jonathan Miller, the contract reflected his promotion from 
Chief Financial Officer to Chief Executive. Post year end, Robbie Bell entered into a service 
agreement dated 3 January 2019.

The Committee acknowledges that Executive Directors may be invited to become 
Independent Non-Executive Directors of other quoted companies which have no business 
relationship with the Company and that these duties can broaden their experience and 

knowledge to the benefit of the Company. Executive Directors are permitted to accept such 
appointments with the prior approval of the Chairman. Approval will only be given where the 
appointment does not present a conflict of interest with the Group’s activities and the wider 
exposure gained will be beneficial to the development of the individual. Where fees are 
payable in respect of such appointments, these would be retained by the Executive Director.

Each of the Executive Directors’ service agreements is terminable by the relevant individual 
or the Company on not less than 12 months’ prior written notice. Executive Directors may be 
put on garden leave during their notice period and the Company can elect to terminate 
their employment by making a payment in lieu of notice equivalent to up to 12 months’ 
basic salary and benefits. The employment of each Executive Director is terminable with 
immediate effect without notice in certain circumstances which include, for example, where 
an Executive Director commits an act of serious misconduct, commits a material or persistent 
breach of any of the terms or conditions of his service agreement, has a bankruptcy order 
made against him, is convicted of a criminal offence, is disqualified from acting as a director 
or acts in a way which may bring the Company or any member of the Group into disrepute. 

The Company’s policy on termination payments is to consider the circumstances on a 
case-by-case basis, taking into account the Executive’s contractual terms, the circumstances 
of termination and any duty to mitigate.

Executive Director service contracts are available for inspection at the registered office 
and at the Annual General Meeting.

Reason for leaving

Bonus

Timing of vesting

Calculation of vesting/payment

Summary dismissal, resignation 1

Awards lapse.

Not applicable.

Good leaver 1, 2

Normally at year end.

Change of control 1

On change of control, or shortly thereafter.

The annual bonus plan for the period under review would normally have performance measured to the end of 
the financial period. In exceptional circumstances, the Committee may bring forward the date of award to the 
termination date and base it on performance over the period to termination. Awards will normally be pro-rated 
for time unless the Committee determines otherwise.

The annual bonus plan for the period under review would normally be paid immediately and be based 
on pro-rata performance to date, with Committee discretion to treat otherwise.

LTIP

Summary dismissal, resignation 

Unvested awards and vested awards that have not 
been called, including shares subject to a holding 
period, lapse.

Not applicable.

Good leaver 1, 2

In line with the vesting schedule at grant.

Change of control

On change of control.

Unvested LTIP shares are normally pro-rated for performance to the end of the performance period. In 
exceptional circumstances, the Committee may bring forward the vesting date to the termination date and 
vest on performance over the period to termination. Awards will normally be pro-rated for time unless the 
committee determines otherwise.

Unvested LTIP shares are normally pro-rated for performance to the date of change of control and paid 
immediately. Awards will normally be pro-rated for time unless the Committee determines otherwise.

1  The treatment of shares subject to deferral or holding periods will be subject to the Remuneration Committee’s discretion and will take into account the circumstances at the time.

2  A ‘good leaver’ is a participant ceasing to be employed by the Group by reason of death, injury, ill health, redundancy, retirement with the consent of the Group, the company of employment ceasing to be a member of the Group or any other reason that the 

Remuneration Committee determines in its absolute discretion (excluding summary dismissal or resignation to join a competitor).

64  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Consideration of employment conditions elsewhere in the Group
The Committee takes into account the levels of basic salary being offered to colleagues 
elsewhere in the Group and, when annually reviewing the salary increases and remuneration 
for the Executive Directors, it looks at what increases are planned for the wider employee 
population. During 2018, the Committee additionally received information about the Group’s 
gender pay gap. Colleagues have not been consulted in respect of the design of the Group’s 
Senior Executive remuneration policy although the Board is reviewing an employee feedback 
mechanism in light of the new UK Corporate Governance Code.

Consideration of shareholder views
The Committee considers shareholder feedback carefully when reviewing remuneration. 
As part of its work to propose the new remuneration policy for approval at the 2018 Annual 
General Meeting, it took advice on current best practice and institutional shareholder 
guidelines. The Committee also undertook an active consultation exercise with shareholders 
representing approximately 65% of the shareholder base in line with the Committee’s policy 
to consult with significant shareholders prior to making any major changes to its Executive 
remuneration structure. Shareholder bodies and advisors were also consulted. 

Feedback from the consultation indicated broad support for the proposals. 
Some respondents sought additional assurance that performance targets would be 
sufficiently stretching considering the proposed increase in potential. In its responses to these 
points, the Committee was able to make reference to the historically low annual bonus 
payouts (approximately 13% on average over the previous three years) as evidence of the 
Committee’s commitment to setting challenging targets. The Committee also explained 
that increasing the proportion of the annual bonus that would be conditional upon strategic 
objectives was intended to ensure that management maintained appropriate focus on these 
important initiatives as well as on delivery of current year financial targets.

The shareholders and advisory bodies who responded, in particular, widely welcomed the 
introduction of mandatory bonus deferral and the proposed increase in the shareholding 
guideline to 200% of salary.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

65

Directors’ remuneration report continued
Annual report on remuneration

This section details the remuneration payable to the Executive and Non-Executive 
Directors (including the Chairman) for the financial year ended 25 November 2018 and 
sets out how we intend to implement our remuneration policy for the 2019 financial year. 
This report, along with the Chair’s annual statement, will be subject to a single advisory 
vote at the AGM on 3 April 2019.

Remuneration Committee composition
The Remuneration Committee is comprised wholly of Independent Non-Executive Directors 
and is supported by the Company Secretary who attends all meetings. The Chief Executive, 
Chief Financial Officer, Chief Operating Officer and Colleague Director, together with the 
Committee’s independent advisers, FIT Remuneration Consultants LLP, attend committee 
meetings by invitation.

Jan

Meeting attendance during the year was as follows:

Meeting attendance

Feb

Georgina Harvey
Remuneration Committee Chair
Senior Independent Director

Sharon Brown
Remuneration Committee member
Independent Non-Executive Director

Jens Hofma
Remuneration Committee Member
Independent Non-Executive Director

Angus Porter
Remuneration Committee member
Chairman of the Board (considered independent on appointment)

Remuneration Committee responsibilities
The Remuneration Committee has responsibility for deciding the terms and conditions of 
employment, remuneration and benefits of the Executive Directors, including pension rights 
and any compensation payments, and for setting the level and structure of remuneration 
for Senior Managers and the implementation of share option or other performance-related 
schemes. In discharging its responsibilities, the Committee must review and have regard to 
the pay and employment conditions across the business. It must also have regard to the views 
of shareholders, the risk appetite of the Group and McColl’s strategic objectives.

To assist them in their work, the Committee appointed FIT as its principal external adviser 
during the year, replacing Kepler, following a competitive tender process. FIT’s fees for 
advice provided to the Remuneration Committee from appointment were £4,500 (exc. VAT). 
Kepler’s fees for 2018, up to the date FIT was appointed, were £51,635 (exc. VAT). FIT does 
not provide any other services to the Group and the Committee is satisfied that it provides 
independent and objective remuneration advice. FIT is a signatory to the Code of Conduct 
for Remuneration Consultants in the UK, details of which can be found on the Remuneration 
Consultants Group’s website at www.remunerationconsultantsgroup.com.

66  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Remuneration Committee activities 
During the 2018 financial year, the Committee met six times to consider the following 
remuneration matters:

Meeting date

Key agenda items

•  considered Remuneration policy consultation
•  approved Executive Directors’ salary increases
•  considered 2017 annual bonus outturn
•  considered 2015 LTIP and CSOP vesting
•  reviewed gender pay gap reporting

•  approved 2017 annual bonus outturn
•  considered 2015 LTIP and CSOP vesting 
•  approved, in principle, the 2018 LTIP and CSOP performance conditions
•  approved 2018 bonus targets
•  considered gender pay gap information
•  evaluated the Committee’s performance as part of Board evaluation

•  reviewed 2018 LTIP and CSOP performance conditions
•  considered Remuneration resolutions for the AGM

Mar

•  commenced a formal review of the Committee’s independent advisor
•  considered CEO pay ratio and Executive Directors’ 

Jul

remuneration reporting

•  approved 2015 LTIP and CSOP vesting 

Oct

Nov

•  formally appointed FIT Remuneration Consultants LLP as the 
Committee’s independent advisor following a competitive 
tender process

•  approved updated terms of reference
•  considered gender pay gap and pay ratio information
•  reviewed proposed pay increases for colleagues across the Group
•  reviewed the Committee’s terms of reference in light of the new UK 

Corporate Governance Code

•  reviewed proposed salary increases for Senior Managers
•  reviewed potential 2018 bonus outturn
•  reviewed progress against targets on existing LTIP and CSOP awards

     
 
 
Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Making sure the Remuneration Committee is well informed
In considering remuneration arrangements, Remuneration Committee members need 
sufficient information to enable them to take account of factors including the Group’s strategy 
and attitude to risk, its financial position and prospects, competitive markets including peer 

Decision

Information needed

group practice, and pay and conditions in place for the wider work force. Examples of 
the information that may be provided to the Remuneration Committee, when making key 
decisions, is set out below.

Determining the remuneration policy

•  understanding of Group strategy and risk appetite
•  remuneration consultancy advice
•  benchmarking data

•  best practice and shareholder guidelines, including 

new developments and emerging trends
•  feedback from shareholder consultations

Deciding Executive Directors’ 
and Senior Managers’ basic 
salary increases

•  benchmarking or market data
•  assessment of individual effectiveness
•  shareholder views

•  details of pay and conditions across the business 

and in particular the pay increases proposed for the 
wider workforce

Determining annual bonus potential 
and performance conditions

•  remuneration policy limits
•  market data
•  Group budget information

•  strategic priorities for the business
•  Group risk appetite
•  shareholder views

Determining annual bonus payouts

•  financial results for relevant period
•  information on the extent to which relevant strategic 

•  consideration of underlying performance of the 

business and wider circumstances, as appropriate

priorities have been achieved

Determining LTIP awards and 
performance conditions

•  remuneration policy limits
•  LTIP rules and share dilution limits 
•  market data

•  relevant financial forecasts based on Group strategy
•  Group risk appetite
•  shareholder views

Determining extent of LTIP vesting

Determining Executive Directors’ 
or Senior Managers’ benefits 
on recruitment

Considering pay and conditions 
across the business

•  LTIP rules and share dilution limits
•  EPS and TSR performance

•  consideration of underlying performance of the 

business and wider circumstances, as appropriate

•  benchmarking or market data
•  evidence of existing pay and rewards package
•  shareholder views

•  evidence of potential payouts under existing 

employer’s incentive arrangements (where applicable)

•  details of pay and conditions across the business
•  details of proposed pay increases
•  alignment of incentives and reward with culture 

•  pay ratio calculations
•  gender pay gap information

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

67

Directors’ remuneration report continued
Annual report on remuneration continued

Shareholder views are expressed through formal consultation as well as the shareholder 
advisory vote on the remuneration report and, every third year, the binding vote on the 
remuneration policy. In addition, account is taken of published institutional investor guidelines. 

Single figure for total remuneration for Non-Executive Directors (audited)
The table below sets out a single figure for the total remuneration received by each 
Non-Executive Director for the period ended 25 November 2018.

Shareholder consultations are conducted periodically when more significant issues arise 
or when changes to the remuneration policy are being considered. 

Written reports are provided in advance and meetings are attended, by invitation, by the 
Executive Directors, Colleague Director and external remuneration adviser so that the written 
reports can be discussed with them and challenged appropriately. 

After each Remuneration Committee meeting, actions are clearly identified, tracked and 
reported back to the Committee as progress is made in completing them. The Committee 
Chairman reports to the Board on the main items discussed at each meeting. 
The Board also receives copies of the Committee’s full minutes unless their circulation 
is deemed inappropriate.

The information provided in this part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report is subject to audit.

Single figure for total remuneration of Executive Directors (audited)
The table below sets out a single figure for the total remuneration received by each Executive 
Director employed by the Company for the period ended 25 November 2018 and the 
prior period:

Salary

Pension 
Benefit1

Taxable 
Benefit2

Annual 
Bonus3

LTIP4

Total

Salary

Taxable Benefit3

Total

£’000

Sharon Brown
Georgina Harvey
Jens Hofma1
Angus Porter2

2018

53
58
45
145

2017

50
55
19
103

2018

2017

4
–
1
2

2
–
–
–

2018

57
58
46
147

2017

52
55
19
103

1  Jens Hofma was appointed a Non-Executive Director on 1 July 2017.

2 

 Angus Porter was appointed a Non-Executive Director on 1 April 2016 and became Non-Executive Chairman on 27 April 2017.

3 

 Taxable benefits include nominal travel expenses to and from Company meetings and tax incurred on those expenses.

The aggregate fees paid to Non-Executive Directors for the year fell within the £500k 
aggregate limit set out in the Company’s Articles of Association.

Basic annual salary (audited)
Current basic salary levels are as follows:

Executive Director

Jonathan Miller 
Dave Thomas
Robbie Bell1

1 January 2019

1 January 2018

% change

£450,840
£293,550
£340,000

£450,840
£293,550
n/a

0%
0%
n/a

£’000
2018
Jonathan Miller 450
Dave Thomas
293
Simon Fuller
289

2017

2018

2017

2018

2017

2018

2017

2018

2017

2018

2017

1  Robbie Bell was appointed a Director with effect from 17 January 2019.

441
284
273

103
44
43

103
43
41

38
19
16

46
21
16

0
0
0

66
43
41

0
0
0

94
78
56

591
356
348

750
469
427

1  Pension benefits comprise pension contributions and/or salary supplement payments. Pension contributions were paid during 

the year for Simon Fuller of £10k (£10k in 2017).

2  Taxable benefits for Jonathan Miller, Dave Thomas and Simon Fuller include healthcare and a car allowance.

3  Annual bonus awarded for performance over the relevant financial period (no bonus was awarded for 2018). Further details 

are provided below.

4  The LTIP values presented above for 2017 represented an estimate of the value of the awards that were expected to vest in 

2018. The actual values, based on the share price at vesting for Jonathan Miller, Dave Thomas and Simon Fuller were £45k, £37k 
and £28k respectively, based on the 30% of the total awards which vested. No vesting has been assumed in respect of the 2016 
LTIP awards vesting in 2019. 

68  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Anticipated value of 2016 LTIP Awards (audited)
The LTIP values included in the single figure table above relate to awards granted on 11 April 
2016 which vest on 11 April 2019 dependent on EPS and TSR performance measured over the 
three year period ended 25 November 2018.

Under the EPS performance target (70% of awards), 25% of this part of an award vests for 
cumulative EPS of 52.5p increasing pro-rata to 100% vesting for cumulative EPS of 60.1p. 
The vesting level is as follows:

Performance target

Cumulative 3 Year Adjusted EPS

Threshold
EPS

52.5p

Maximum
EPS

60.1p

Actual
EPS

40.9p

Vesting % 
(max 100%)

0%

Under the TSR performance target (30% of awards), 25% of this part of an award vests for 
median TSR increasing pro-rata to full vesting for upper quartile TSR, as follows:

Performance target

v FTSE All Share General Retailers, 
Food & Drugs Retailers

Median
TSR

Upper 
quartile
TSR

Actual
TSR

Vesting %
(max 100%)

-31%

13%

10%

97%

Notwithstanding the vesting against the TSR performance condition, the Remuneration 
Committee used its discretion to determine that there should be no vesting in light of share 
price performance following the year end.

Annual bonus (audited)
The Group operates an annual performance related bonus scheme for a number of Senior 
Managers including Executive Directors. For the 2018 financial period, annual bonuses 
for the Executive Directors were based 70% on operating profit and 30% on key strategic 
performance measures. 

For the operating profit element of the 2018 annual bonus, the performance condition was 
set such that no vesting would occur below threshold, being 95% of target. At threshold 
and target, 10% and 50% of the profit element of the bonus would be awarded respectively. 
Maximum vesting of the profit element would be awarded for achievement of the stretch 
condition of 110% of on-target operating profit. Payments in between these points of 
measurement increase on a straight-line basis. Achievement of threshold operating profit 
is required before any of the strategic performance element of the bonus can vest. 

The maximum total bonus potential for 2018 was 100% of salary for Executive Directors. 
The targets, and achievement against them, were as follows:

Measure

Adjusted operating profit* 
Strategic performance

Total

Weighting
(% of 
salary)

70%
30%

Threshold

Target

Stretch Achievement

£33.9m £36.7m £41.3m

£17.9m
See table 
below

*  Before bonus, profit on asset disposals and exceptional items.

Weighting
(% of 

Strategic performance

salary) Committee assessment

Successful transition of all 
stores to the new wholesale 
supply arrangements, 
including the launch of the 
Safeway range*

Delivery of the Group’s store 
refresh programme for 2018

Implementation of a new 
customer plan

10%

10%

10%

Since the threshold operating 
target was not reached, no bonus 
is payable against any of the three 
strategic targets, notwithstanding 
that some of the objectives (x, y, z) 
had been achieved.

*  Except the 298 Co-op stores acquired in 2017 which are subject to a separate supply agreement.

Payout
(% of 
maximum)

0%
0%

0%

Payout
(% of salary)

0%

0%

0%

69

Directors’ remuneration report continued
Annual report on remuneration continued

As a result of EPS (70% of awards) and the downward discretion applied in respect of the 
TSR (30% of awards) performance, the gross value of LTIP share awards expected to vest on 
11 April 2019 are as follows:

Performance target

Jonathan Miller
Dave Thomas
Simon Fuller

Total shares 
under award

Proportion to 
vest based on 
EPS (70%)

Proportion to 
vest based on 
TSR (30%)

Number of 
shares to vest

Value
(£’000)

Executive

259,036
166,265
159,638

0%
0%
0%

0%
0%
0%

0
0
0

0
0
0

Jonathan Miller

Dave Thomas

Simon Fuller

LTIP awards granted in 2018
The following LTIP awards were granted to Executive Directors during the year: 

Date of 
grant

Proportion 
of salary

Maximum 
shares 
awarded

EPS
(70% of awards)

TSR
(30% of 
awards)

21 March 
2018
15 August 
2018
21 March 
2018
15 August 
2018
21 March 
2018

100%

196,017

50%

168,223

100%

127,630

50%

109,533

100%

122,704

Note 1

Note 2

Note 1

Note 2

Note 1

Note 3

1  25% of this part of an award vests for cumulative EPS for 2018, 2019 and 2020 of 60.4p increasing pro-rata to 100% vesting for 

cumulative EPS of 71.9p.

2  25% of this part of an award vests for cumulative EPS for 2018, 2019 and 2020 of 64.5p increasing pro-rata to 100% vesting for 

cumulative EPS of 71.9p.

3  25% of this part of an award vests for median performance increasing pro-rata to 100% vesting for upper quartile against the 

constituents of the FTSE All Share General Retailers and FTSE All Share Food & Drugs Retailers.

In addition, for the LTIP awards to become exercisable the Committee must be satisfied that 
the formulaic LTIP outcome is a genuine reflection of the underlying performance of the 
business. The Committee has discretion to adjust the formulaic LTIP outcome downwards, 
or upwards (with shareholder consultation), within the plan limits. 

An additional holding period of 2 years will apply.

70  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Outstanding LTIP Awards
Unvested LTIP grants in respect of Executive Directors who served during the year are outlined below:

Executive Director

Jonathan Miller

Dave Thomas 

Simon Fuller

Date of grant

Number of shares

Share price1
(pence)

Face value  
(£’000)

Face value  
(% salary)

Vesting for threshold 
performance2, 3, 4  
(% of maximum)

11 April 2016
15 March 2017
21 March 2018
15 August 2018

11 April 2016
15 March 2017
21 March 2018
15 August 2018

11 April 2016
15 March 2017
21 March 2018

259,036
237,634
196,017
168,223

166,265
153,225
127,630
109,533

159,638
147,311
122,704

166.00
186.00
230.00
134.00

166.00
186.00  
230.00
134.00

166.00
186.00
230.00

430
442
451
225

276
285 
294
147

265
274
282

100%
100%
100%
50%

100%
100% 
100%
50%

100%
100%
100%

25%
25%
25%
25%

25%
25%
25%
25%

25%
25%
25%

End of performance  

period

25 November 2018
24 November 2019
29 November 2020
29 November 2020

25 November 2018
24 November 2019
29 November 2020
29 November 2020

25 November 2018
24 November 2019
29 November 2020

1  Call Price per Award Share: £0.001.

2  2016 LTIP EPS performance conditions range is 52.5 pence to 60.1 pence (70% of awards), TSR versus retailer comparator group (30% of awards).

3  2017 LTIP EPS performance conditions range is 60.4 pence to 68.6 pence (70% of awards), TSR versus retailer comparator group (30% of awards).

4  2018 LTIP EPS performance conditions are set out in the section above.

Directors’ shareholdings and interest in shares (audited)
The current Remuneration Policy sets shareholding guidelines which require Executive Directors to acquire and maintain, over time, a personal shareholding in the Company of at least 
equivalent to 200% of salary.

The table below sets out, for Directors who served during the year, their interests in McColl’s shares and share options as at 25 November 2018.

Options held3

Shares held3

Unvested and  
subject to  
deferral

Unvested and  
subject to 
performance

Vested but not 
exercised

Unvested and 
subject to continued 
employment

Owned outright

Current shareholding 
(% of salary/fee1)

Shareholding 
requirement  

(% of salary/fee)

Guideline met?

Director

Executive Directors
Jonathan Miller2
Dave Thomas
Simon Fuller

Non Executive Directors
Georgina Harvey
Sharon Brown
Angus Porter
Jens Hofma

– 
–
–

n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

860,910
556,653
429,653

n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

33,568
27,972
20,134

n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

–
–
–

n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

11,399,500
1,183,792
–

10,471
17,471
5,814
–

3,192
509
–

24
40
5
–

200%
200%
200%

n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

1 

 Based on closing share price of £1.2625 at 23 November 2018 (the last trading day before the year-end) and prevailing salaries/fees on 25 November 2018.

2 

 The ordinary shares held by Jonathan Miller include shares held beneficially via holdings of connected persons.

3 

 There have been no changes in the Directors’ interests in the shares issued or options granted by the Company between the end of the period and the date of this report.

Yes
Yes
No

n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

71

Directors’ remuneration report continued
Annual report on remuneration continued

Executive Directors’ pension arrangements (audited)
Jonathan Miller, received a salary supplement in lieu of pension for the full year. As a 
percentage of salary this payment represented 22.9% of basic salary paid to him in the 
year. The monetary amount of his pension supplement shall remain fixed until it reaches 
20% of his salary, at which point it will increase in accordance with the Remuneration policy. 
Dave Thomas received a salary supplement in lieu of pension equivalent to 15% of his basic 
salary. Simon Fuller received a combination of salary supplement in lieu of pension and 
pension contributions equivalent, in aggregate, to 15% of his basic salary.

Non-Executive Director fees (audited)
Non-Executive Director fees are as follows:

Chairman
Base fee
Additional fee for Senior Independent Director
Additional fee for Audit & Risk Committee Chair
Additional fee for Remuneration Committee Chair

1  From appointment on 27 April 2017.

From  
1 February 
2019

From  
1 February  

From  
1 February  

2018

2017

£145,000
£45,000
£5,000
£8,000
£8,000

£145,000
£45,000
£5,000
£8,0002
£8,0002 

£145,0001
£45,000
£5,000
£5,000
£5,000

2  As reported last year, these fees were increased on 1 February 2018 to reflect the increasing time commitment required 

for these roles.

Payments for loss of office (audited)
No compensation payments were made for loss of office during the year.

Simon Fuller ceased to be a Director on 22 February 2019. He was paid salary and benefits 
to the date of cessation. He is not eligible for an annual bonus for 2019 and all LTIP awards 
lapsed at cessation. No other payments will be made.

Payments to previous Directors (audited)
No payments were made to previous Directors during the financial period under review.

72  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

The information in this part of the Annual Report on Remuneration is not subject to audit.

Total shareholder return 

Historical Performance graph – Value of £100 invested on 28 February 2014

200

180

160

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

McColl’s

FTSE All Share General Retailers Index

FTSE All Share Index

FTSE All Share Food & Drug Retailers Index

Feb
2014

Nov
2014

Nov
2015

Nov
2016

Nov
2017

Nov
2018

The graph above shows the total shareholder return of the Group and the FTSE All Share 
Index and the FTSE All Share Food & Drug Retailers Index since listing. The FTSE All Share 
Index is chosen as it is a broad market index of which the Group is a member, and the 
FTSE All Share Food and Drug Retailers Index is chosen to illustrate performance relative 
to sector comparators.

Chief Executive single figure of remuneration

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

2018

James Lancaster
Single figure of remuneration 
(£’000)
Annual bonus outcome 
(% of max)
LTIP vesting (% of max)

Jonathan Miller1
Single figure of remuneration 
(£’000)
Annual bonus outcome 
(% of max)
LTIP vesting (% of max)

834

0%
n/a

–

–
–

3,199

0%
n/a

–

–
–

840

0%
n/a

–

–
–

339

39.4%
n/a

n/a

n/a
n/a

n/a

n/a
n/a

504

750

591

39.4%
n/a

15.0%
30.0%

0%
0%2

1 

 Jonathan Miller was appointed Chief Executive upon the retirement of James Lancaster from that position on 1 April 2016.

2   The Remuneration Committee used its discretion to reduce the formulaic vesting of 29% to zero.

Change in Chief Executive’s remuneration
The table below sets out the percentage change in the remuneration of the Chief Executive 
and the average increase across all employees excluding the Board between the years 2017 
and 2018.

Salary (£’000)
Pension benefit (£’000)
Taxable benefits (£’000)
Annual variable (£’000)

Chief Executive annual cash (£’000)

2017

441
103
46
160

2018

450
 103
38
0

Average change 
across all 
employees

2.7%
0%
0%
-52.9%

Change

2%
0%
-17%
-100%

Distribution statement
The following chart shows for the current and preceding financial period the actual 
expenditure and percentage change in total remuneration paid to or receivable by 
colleagues and distributions to shareholders.

Employment remuneration

2018

2017

Distribution to shareholders

2018

2017

+9%

£191m

£176m

+1%

£11.9m

£11.7m

The Group paid an interim dividend of 3.4 pence per share and the Board has recommended 
a final dividend of 0.6 pence per share subject to approval by shareholders at the Annual 
General Meeting, representing a total payment of £4.6m for 2018. 

Statement of shareholder voting
The following table shows the results of the binding vote on the remuneration policy and the 
advisory vote on the 2017 Annual Statement and Annual Report on Remuneration at the 
12 April 2018 Annual General Meeting.

Votes

Number

%

Number

%

2017 Annual Statement and Annual 
Report on Remuneration
Remuneration policy 2018

101,088,652
85,683,168

99.9
86.1

110,235
13,850,649

0.1
13.9

For

Against

Withheld

Number

3,000
1,668,070

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

that the Committee wished to propose to shareholders for approval at the Annual General 
Meeting in 2018 together with some details about potential changes to the Committee’s 
implementation of the policy. Feedback indicated broad support for the proposed changes 
although the Committee noted a small minority of shareholders failed to support the 
new policy. 

Implementation of the Remuneration Policy for 2019 and details of new  
Chief Financial Officer’s package
In respect of the Chief Executive (Jonathan Miller) and Chief Operating Officer 
(Dave Thomas):

•  There will be no changes to base salary, benefits and pension provision.
•  The maximum bonus opportunity will continue to be set at 100% of base salary. 70% of the 
annual bonus will be determined by operating profit targets, 10% will be determined by 
revenue targets and 20% will be determined by strategic performance. The targets are 
commercially sensitive although disclosure of the targets and performance against the 
targets will be set out in the 2019 Directors’ Remuneration report.

•  Given the current share price volatility and noting the recent appointment of our new 

Chief Financial Officer (see below), the Remuneration Committee considers it appropriate 
to delay the normal LTIP grant for 2019 for a period of time. Awards will be granted to 
the Executive Directors, although it should be noted that the Chief Executive and Chief 
Operating Officer’s LTIP award levels will be reduced from the normal 150% of salary level 
to reflect the recent share price decline (noting that the Chief Financial Officer’s award 
level of 125% of salary was agreed as part of his recruitment package and will therefore be 
honoured). While the Committee is not in a position to agree and disclose the performance 
targets at this point, they will be appropriately challenging and fully disclosed in the RNS 
published shortly after the grant date and in next year’s Directors’ Remuneration report. 
A two year holding period will apply to any awards granted in 2019.

As announced on 4 January 2019, Robbie Bell was appointed Chief Financial Officer on 
17 January 2019. Details of the main elements of his package are as follows:

•  Base salary: £340,000
•  Pension: 12% of salary
•  Annual bonus: 100% of salary (pro-rated for the year of joining) with targets aligned  

to the Chief Executive and Chief Operating Officer.

•  LTIP: 125% of salary for 2019 with targets aligned to the Chief Executive  

and Chief Operating Officer. 

Approved by the Remuneration Committee and signed on its behalf:

Shareholder consultations
In December 2017 the Remuneration Committee Chairman wrote to advisory bodies and 
shareholders holding 1% or more of the Company’s capital, who collectively represented 
approximately 65% of all shares. The letter described changes to the remuneration policy 

Georgina Harvey
Chair of the Remuneration Committee

73

Directors’ report

McColl’s Retail Group plc 
(the “Company” or “McColl’s”, 
or “Group”) operates more than 1,550 
convenience and newsagent stores 
offering a wide range of products 
and services to neighbourhoods 
across the United Kingdom. Our 
principal activities are described 
in more detail in the Strategic Report 
on pages 1 to 38.

Governance at McColl’s

Corporate governance
The Board comprises three Executive Directors, led by our 
Chief Executive, Jonathan Miller, our Chairman, Angus Porter 
who was deemed independent on appointment, and three 
Independent Non-Executive Directors. The Board fully meets 
the higher standard of independence requirements that 
apply to FTSE 350 companies under the provisions of the UK 
Corporate Governance Code (the Code).

The Board’s full commitment to the Code is described 
in the Corporate Governance report, together with the 
memberships, remits and activities of the Nomination, Audit 
& Risk and Remuneration Committees, all of which are set out 
on pages 44 to 73 and form part of this Directors’ report.

Directors
Details of our current Directors can be found on pages 
40 and 41. The following Directors served during the year, 
with the exception of Robbie Bell who was appointed Chief 
Financial Officer in January 2019.

Director

Angus Porter

Position

Appointment date2

Non-Executive 
Chairman 

1 April 2016

Jonathan Miller

Chief Executive

3 February 2014

Simon Fuller1

Robbie Bell

Dave Thomas

Georgina Harvey

Sharon Brown

Jens Hofma

Chief Financial 
Officer

Chief Financial 
Officer

Chief Operating 
Officer

Senior Independent 
Director 
Remuneration 
Committee 
Chairman

Independent Non-
Executive Director
Audit & Risk 
Committee 
Chairman

Independent Non-
Executive Director

1 April 2016

17 January 2019

3 February 2014

7 February 2014

7 February 2014

1 July 2017

1  Simon Fuller resigned as a Director and left the business on 22 February 2019 

following a period of handover to his successor, Robbie Bell.

2  Appointment dates for Jonathan Miller, Dave Thomas and Simon Fuller indicate 
when they were appointed to the Board of the Company. All were employees of 
the Group prior to the appointment dates shown and, in the case of Jonathan 
Miller and Dave Thomas, were Directors of the previous holding company prior 
to IPO.

74  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Powers of Directors
The general powers of the Directors are set out in article 94 of 
the Company’s articles. This provides that the business and 
affairs of the Company shall be managed by the Directors, 
subject to any limitations imposed by the articles, prevailing 
legislation or any directions given by special resolution of the 
shareholders of the Company.

Conflicts of interest
The Board considers and authorises potential or actual 
conflicts as appropriate and these decisions are kept 
under review by the Nomination Committee. Directors with 
a conflict do not participate in the discussion or vote on 
the matter in question. Further detail can be found in the 
Corporate Governance Report on page 49.

Compensation for loss of office
The Company does not have arrangements with any 
Director that would provide compensation for loss of office 
or employment resulting from a takeover, except that 
provisions of the Company’s share plans may cause options 
and awards granted under such plans to vest on a takeover. 
Further information is provided in the Remuneration Report 
on page 64.

Directors’ indemnities and liability insurance
As is standard practice for listed companies, the Company 
has granted a third party indemnity to each of its Directors 
against any liability that attaches to them in defending 
proceedings brought against them to the fullest extent 
permitted under English law. In addition, the Company 
maintains directors’ and officers’ indemnity insurance 
cover for any legal action brought against its Directors. 
Specific public offering and securities insurance cover was 
also placed on 28 February 2014 with a six year run-off period.

The Company’s articles of association
The Company’s articles of association (“articles”) set out 
the rights of shareholders including voting rights, distribution 
rights, attendance at general meetings, powers of Directors, 
proceedings of Directors as well as borrowing limits and 
other governance controls. A copy of the articles can be 
requested from the Company Secretary. The Company may 
alter its articles by special resolution passed at a general 
meeting of the Company and intends to seek shareholder 
approval at the forthcoming AGM. Further details on the 
proposed changes can be found on page 79.

Disclosures required under Listing Rule 9.8.4
Details of long term incentive schemes are included in the 
Directors’ Remuneration Report. The remaining disclosures 
required by Listing Rule 9.8.4 are not applicable to McColl’s.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

McColl’s shareholders 

Share capital
Details of the share capital from 27 November 2017 to 
25 November 2018 are shown in note 25 of the financial 
statements. The nominal value of the total issued ordinary 
share shares of 0.1 pence each in the capital of the 
Company at the start of the year was £115,172.77 (being 
dividend into 115,172,774 fully paid ordinary shares) and at the 
end of the year was £115,173.51, (being divided into 115,173,515 
fully paid ordinary shares).

The rights attached to the shares can be summarised 
as follows:

1. 

 the ordinary shares rank equally for voting purposes;

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

 on a show of hands each shareholder has one vote and 
on a poll each shareholder has one vote per ordinary 
share held;

 each ordinary share ranks equally for any 
dividend declared;

 each ordinary share ranks equally for any distributions 
made on a winding up of the Company; and

 each ordinary share ranks equally in the right to receive 
a relative proportion of shares on the event of a 
capitalisation of reserves.

The Group has an Employee Benefit Trust (EBT) for the 
benefit of employees and former employees of the Group. 
Currently the EBT holds no ordinary shares in the Company.

75

Directors’ report continued

Shareholders’ rights
The rights attaching to the ordinary shares are governed by 
the articles and prevailing legislation. There are no specific 
restrictions on the size of a holding. Subject to applicable law 
and the articles, holders of ordinary shares are entitled to 
receive all shareholder documents, including notice of any 
general meeting; to attend, speak and exercise voting rights 
at general meetings, either in person or by proxy; and to 
participate in any distribution of income or capital.

Restrictions on transfers of securities
As at 25 November 2018, the ordinary shares are freely 
transferable with the following specific exception.

In compliance with the Company’s share dealing code, 
the Directors, designated employees and their connected 
persons require approval to deal in the Company’s shares. 
There are no restrictions on the transfer, or limitations on the 
holding of ordinary shares. The Company is not aware of any 
other agreements between shareholders that may result in 
restrictions on the transfer of securities or voting rights.

Substantial shareholdings
Information on major interests in shares provided to the 
Company under the Disclosure and Transparency Rules 
(DTR) of the UK Listing Authority is published via a Regulatory 
Information Service and on the Company’s website at 
www.mccollsplc.co.uk/rns.

As at the financial year-end and as of 28 February 2019 
(being the last practical day before printing) the Company 
has been notified of the interests detailed in the following 
table, each of which represented holdings of 3% or more 
of the ordinary shares of the Company. This information 
was correct at the date of notification. 

It should be noted that these holdings may have changed 
since notified to the Company. However, notification of any 
change is not required until the next applicable threshold 
is crossed.

Shareholder

Klarus Capital 
Limited

Aberforth  
Partners LLP

25 November 2018

28 February 2019

Number of 
shares

% interest  
in shares

Number of 
shares

% interest  
in shares

13,118,391

11.39% 13,118,391

11.39%

11,598,247

10.07% 11,598,247

10.07%

Jonathan Miller1

11,399,500

9.90% 11,399,500

FIL Limited 

6,713,277

5.82% 6,713,277

Miton Group plc

6,305,354

5.47% 4,243,296

Chelverton Asset 
Management

FMR LLC

5,950,000

5,779,091

5.17% 5,950,000

5.01% 5,779,091

Laxey Partners Ltd

3,867,360

3.36% 3,867,360

CI Investments Inc

3,600,000

3.13% 3,600,000

9.90%

5.82%

3.68%

5.17%

5.01%

3.36%

3.13%

Jerry Zucker 
Revocable Trust

–

–

3,500,000

3.04%

Directors’ interests
There is a shareholding guideline within the Remuneration 
Policy that encourages Executive Directors to establish and 
hold McColl’s shares equivalent in value to 200% of salary. 
The Directors are not required to hold shares in the Company 
under the articles or under their letters of appointment or 
service agreements. All of the Directors, except Simon Fuller, 
Jens Hofma and Robbie Bell, hold McColl’s shares and details 
of their shareholdings can be found in the Remuneration 
Report on page 71.

McColl’s stakeholders

Colleague engagement 
Further information about our colleague engagement is 
provided on pages 29 to 31.

Corporate responsibility and the environment
The Company’s social and environmental review, including 
information about our greenhouse gas emissions and 
approach to corporate responsibility, is set out on pages 
27 to 33. 

In 2017 we defined four corporate values to inform the way 
the business, through its colleagues, operates and behaves. 
Our values are:

Customer
first

Simple and
consistent

Caring and
compassionate

Community
champions

The process overall to embed these values into our everyday 
operations by incorporating them into policies and 
procedures and by communicating them clearly so that 
there is a good level of awareness and understanding about 
what is expected of McColl’s colleague is ongoing.

The Board and its Committees regularly review the Group’s 
policies and take responsibility for them. 

76  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

1  The ordinary shares held by Jonathan Miller include shares held beneficially 

via individual holdings of connected persons (as defined in sections 252 to 255  
of the Companies Act 2006).

Financial matters

External Auditor
Deloitte LLP have given their independent report on the 
financial statements to the shareholders of the Company 
on pages 81 to 90.

Directors’ statement of disclosure of information 
to Auditor
The Directors who held office at the date of approval of 
this Directors’ Report confirm that, so far as they are each 
aware, there is no relevant audit information (as defined 
in Section 418(2) of the Companies Act 2006) of which the 
Company’s Auditor is unaware; and each Director has taken 
all the steps that they ought to have taken as a Director to 
make themselves aware of any relevant audit information 
and to establish that the Company’s Auditor is aware of 
that information. This confirmation is given and should be 
interpreted in accordance with the provisions of Section 418 
of the Companies Act 2006.

Post year-end events
Between 25 November 2018 and the date of this report there 
have been no material events. 

Financial risk management
The Company manages its risks to ensure that the Group’s 
performance is not adversely affected by its exposure to 
financial risks resulting from its operation and sources of 
finance. Financial risk management objectives and policies, 
including information on financial risks that materially 
impact the Group can be found in notes 20 and 27 of the 
Group’s financial statements. Details are also available in the 
summary of the principal risks and uncertainties faced by the 
business and management’s approach to identifying and 
managing risk which are provided on pages 34 to 38.

Future developments within the Group
Disclosures in relation to likely future developments within the 
Group are contained in the Strategic Report.

Going concern
The Directors have made appropriate enquiries and consider 
that the Group has adequate resources to continue in 
operational existence for the foreseeable future, which 
comprises the period of at least 12 months from the date of 
approval of the financial statements. The Directors continue 
to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the financial 
statements. The financial position of the Group, its cash flows 
and liquidity position are set out in the financial statements 
section on pages 91 to 124. Furthermore, notes 18 and 
27 to the Consolidated Financial Statements include the 
Group’s objectives and policies for managing its capital, its 
financial risk management objectives, details of its financial 
instruments and its exposure to credit and liquidity risk.

In November 2018, the Company signed an amended credit 
facility agreement, which provides improved headroom 
against the covenants. The updated facility consists of a 
£100m Revolving Credit Facility and an amortising £87.5m 
term loan (originally £100m initially being repaid at £2.5m per 
quarter). In addition, there is a £50m unsecured accordion 
facility available at the Company’s option. At the end of the 
period, the Group had drawn down £125.5m (2017: £154.5m) 
of its facilities.

Following a disruptive year, the Directors reviewed the long-
term forecasts covering all elements of income, balance 
sheet and cash flow. The Directors, taking into account these 
forecasts and the revised facilities available to the Group, 
continue to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the 
financial statements. 

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

In considering going concern, the Directors have assessed 
the possible impacts of Brexit on the business and specifically 
its financial covenants. These potential impacts could 
include a short-term reduction in sales, due to product 
shortages, pressures on gross margin and a higher level 
of cost inflation. The overall going concerns scenarios the 
Company has modelled include assessing a 1% LFL worsening 
compared to plan, nil year on year gross margin growth 
despite anticipated product mix improvements and delays to 
the intended sale and leaseback programme. This review has 
been completed alongside a general consideration of the 
potential medium term impacts of an unfavourable Brexit. 

As well as this, other scenarios have been modelled to 
consider potential shorter term effects, including looking 
at a more material sales reduction of approximately 11% in 
April and May and then 2% thereafter, as customers migrate 
to new products and/or supply chains stabilise. In both the 
short and medium term considerations it is expected that 
the majority of product cost inflation would be passed on 
to customers and therefore could be mitigated overall. 
Whilst in the short term the covenant headroom is tighter, 
having modelled these scenarios and the mitigating 
actions, the directors remain confident that the business 
is a going concern.

In the event of a far more challenging Brexit than the 
scenarios modelled or the business currently anticipates, 
there remain a number of further mitigating actions that 
could be taken, including significantly reducing capex and 
dividends and, for the most severe outcomes, reviewing our 
current arrangements with our supportive banking syndicate.

The Directors have made this assessment after consideration 
of various scenarios covering the sensitivity of assumptions 
and management actions to mitigate, and in accordance 
with the Guidance on Risk Management, Internal Control 
and Related Financial and Business Reporting published 
by the UK Financial Reporting Council in September 2014.

77

Directors’ report continued

Viability statement 
In accordance with provision C.2.2 of the Code, the Directors 
have assessed the prospects of the Group over a longer 
period than the 12 months required by the ‘going concern’ 
provision. The Directors have assessed the viability of the 
Group over a three year period through to 2021 which 
coincides with the Group’s strategic review period.

This assessment has considered the potential impact of the 
principal risks on the business model, future performance 
and liquidity over the period. In making this statement the 
Directors have considered the resilience of the Group under 
varying market conditions together with the effectiveness of 
any mitigating actions.

As already described in the statement of going concern, as 
part of this assessment the Directors have taken account of 
the Group’s revolving credit facility with accordion option 
which runs through to July 2021, strong track record of 
operational cash inflow and revised long-term forecasts.

Additionally, the Directors have considered the impact of 
government and legislative changes primarily Brexit and 
concluded that whilst uncertainty exists, the business has 
sufficient options available to mitigate these risks.

Finally it is noted that even in the event of a very severe 
impact on the business through continued food deflation 
and cost inflation, the business could reduce or suspend 
acquisitions activity, re-assess the dividend payouts and 
make further asset disposals. 

Based on this assessment, the Directors have a reasonable 
expectation that the Group will have sufficient resources to 
continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due 
over the period to November 2021.

78  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Dividend
The Board’s policy is that the Company will generally pay an 
interim and a final dividend in the approximate proportions 
one-third and two-thirds respectively. 

An interim dividend of 3.4p per share was paid on 
7 September 2018. The Directors have also proposed  
a final dividend of 0.6 pence per share, amounting to  
£691k, which is subject to shareholder approval at the AGM. 
Provided shareholder approval is received the final dividend 
will be paid on 6 June 2019 to those shareholders on the 
register at the close of business on 26 April 2019. 

Reappointment of Auditor
Deloitte LLP was originally appointed as McColl’s Auditor 
in 2006 when it was a private limited group. Although the 
Company has until 2024 to tender the external audit, the 
Company advised last year that the audit tender process 
would take place in 2019 and that process has now 
commenced.  Deloitte LLP, have indicated their willingness 
to continue as the Company’s Auditor until the tender 
process is completed. Accordingly a resolution to reappoint 
Deloitte LLP as Auditor of the Company and the Group will 
be proposed at the 2019 AGM. Further details regarding the 
re-appointment of Auditor may be found in the Audit & Risk 
Committee Report on page 55.

The Audit Partner last rotated during the year ended 
30 November 2014 so this is the final year for the current 
Audit Partner.

Annual General Meeting

AGM
The Board welcome the opportunity to meet and engage 
with shareholders at the AGM which will be held on 
3 April 2019 at 1.30pm at the registered office: McColl’s 
House, Ashwells Road, Brentwood, Essex CM15 9ST. 
The Chairman of the Board and of each of its Committees 
will be in attendance at the AGM to answer questions 
from shareholders. 

All Directors will be standing for reappointment at the AGM. 
The notice of the AGM and an explanation of the resolutions 
to be put to the meeting are set out in the Notice of Meeting 
accompanying this Annual Report and Accounts. 

The Board fully supports all the resolutions and encourages 
shareholders to vote in favour of each of them as they intend 
to in respect of their own shareholdings.

Appointment and retirement of Directors
Following recommendation of the Nomination Committee, 
all current Directors, with the exception of Simon Fuller and 
Robbie Bell, will stand for re-election at the Company’s 
Annual General Meeting (AGM) in voluntary compliance 
with provision B.7 of the Code. This practice also exceeds the 
requirement of the articles for Directors to retire by rotation 
at every third AGM. Robbie Bell will stand for election having 
been appointed to the Board on 17 January 2019. Simon Fuller 
is leaving the business on 22 February 2019. 

The Company may, in accordance with and subject to the 
provisions of the Companies Act 2006, remove any Director 
before expiry of his or her term of office by ordinary resolution 
of which special notice has been given. The Company must 
have a minimum of two Directors.

Further information on appointments to the Board is set out 
in the Corporate Governance Report on pages 44 to 47 and 
the Nomination Committee report on pages 48 to 50.

Authority to allot shares
The Company was granted a general authority by its 
shareholders at the 2018 AGM to allot shares pursuant to a 
rights issue up to an aggregate nominal amount of £76,780. 
The Company also received authority to allot shares for 
cash on a non pre-emptive basis up to a maximum nominal 
amount of £38,390. As at the date of this report, no shares 
have been issued under these authorities. These authorities 
will expire at the conclusion of the 2019 AGM unless revoked, 
varied or renewed prior to that meeting. 

Resolutions will be proposed at the 2019 AGM to renew 
these authorities.

Authority for the Company to purchase its own shares
A resolution was passed at the 2018 AGM authorising the 
Company to purchase up to approximately 10% of its 
ordinary shares (11,517,351 ordinary shares) at the Directors’ 
discretion. At the date of this report, no ordinary shares have 
been purchased under this authority. A similar resolution 
is proposed to be passed at the 2019 AGM which will, if 
approved, replace the existing authority and will lapse  
at the conclusion of the 2020 AGM.

Political donations
Further to shareholder approval at the 2018 AGM 
empowering the Directors to make political donations 
or incur political expenses, it is confirmed that no such 
donations were made or expenses incurred in the year 
ended 25 November 2018 (2017: £nil). The Company’s policy 
is not to make political donations or incur political expenses 
but a resolution to renew this authority on its expiry will be 
put to the 2019 AGM in order to avoid any inadvertent 
breach of the regulatory requirements that might occur 
if a wide interpretation of political donation were to be 
applied to, for example, some of the Group’s community 
support activities. 

Articles of Association
It is proposed that the Company adopts new Articles of 
Association, principally in order to reflect developments in 
law and practice since the Company’s current articles were 
adopted in 2014. Full details of the changes can be found in 
the Notice of Meeting.

A copy of the New Articles and a copy marked to show the 
changes from the current Articles are available for inspection 
and can be viewed on the Company’s website. Copies of 
the New Articles will also be available for inspection at the 
Annual General Meeting.

Deferred Bonus Plan 
The Company’s Remuneration Policy requires Executive 
Directors and members of the Retail Board to use a 
proportion of their net bonus to acquire shares, which must 
be held for a period of three years. In order to implement this 
requirement, and to enable the Company to issue shares to 
satisfy awards, the Board is proposing to adopt the McColl’s 
Retail Group plc Deferred Bonus Plan (the “DBP”). A summary 
of the DBP is set out in further detail in the Notice of AGM. 

The Strategic Report, the Directors’ Report and the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report were approved by the Board.

By order of the Board

Rachel Peat
Company Secretary

17 February 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

79

Directors’ responsibilities statement

The directors are responsible for 
preparing the Annual Report and the 
financial statements in accordance 
with applicable law and regulations.

1  Where the financial statements are published on the internet we would 

encourage inclusion of this paragraph in the directors’ responsibility statement 
unless there is a disclaimer to similar effect on the website. If there is no 
disclaimer on the website and it is not included here, consider inclusion in 
the  auditors’ report.

80  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Company law requires the Directors to prepare financial 
statements for each financial year. Under that law the 
directors are required to prepare the group financial 
statements in accordance with International Financial 
Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the European 
Union and Article 4 of the IAS Regulation and have elected 
to prepare the parent company financial statements in 
accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted 
Accounting Practice (United Kingdom Accounting Standards 
and applicable law), including FRS 101 “Reduced Disclosure 
Framework”. Under company law the directors must not 
approve the accounts unless they are satisfied that they 
give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the company 
and of the profit or loss of the company for that period. 

The directors are responsible for keeping adequate 
accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain 
the company’s transactions and disclose with reasonable 
accuracy at any time the financial position of the company 
and enable them to ensure that the financial statements 
comply with the Companies Act 2006. They are also 
responsible for safeguarding the assets of the company 
and hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention 
and detection of fraud and other irregularities.

The directors are responsible for the maintenance and 
integrity of the corporate and financial information included 
on the company’s website. Legislation in the United Kingdom 
governing the preparation and dissemination of financial 
statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.1

In preparing the parent company financial statements, the 
directors are required to:

•  select suitable accounting policies and then apply 

them consistently;

•  make judgments and accounting estimates that are 

reasonable and prudent;

•  [state whether applicable UK Accounting Standards 

have been followed, subject to any material departures 
disclosed and explained in the financial statements;

•  prepare the financial statements on the going concern 

basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the 
company will continue in business.

In preparing the group financial statements, International 
Accounting Standard 1 requires that directors:

•  properly select and apply accounting policies;

•  present information, including accounting policies, in 

a manner that provides relevant, reliable, comparable 
and understandable information; 

•  provide additional disclosures when compliance with the 
specific requirements in IFRSs are insufficient to enable 
users to understand the impact of particular transactions, 
other events and conditions on the entity’s financial 
position and financial performance; and

•  make an assessment of the company’s ability to continue 

as a going concern.

Responsibility statement 
We confirm that to the best of our knowledge:

•  the financial statements, prepared in accordance with the 
relevant financial reporting framework, give a true and fair 
view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or 
loss of the company and the undertakings included in the 
consolidation taken as a whole;

•  the strategic report includes a fair review of the 

development and performance of the business and the 
position of the company and the undertakings included 
in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a 
description of the principal risks and uncertainties that 
they face; and

•  the annual report and financial statements, taken as 
a whole, are fair, balanced and understandable and 
provide the information necessary for shareholders to 
assess the company’s position and performance, business 
model and strategy.

This responsibility statement was approved by the board of 
directors on 18 February 2019 and is signed on its behalf by:

Jonathan Miller 
Chief Executive 

17 February 2019 

Robbie Bell
Chief Financial Officer

17 February 2019

 
Financial statements

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Independent Auditor’s report to the members of McColl’s Retail Group plc

Report on the audit of the financial statements

Opinion
In our opinion:

•  the financial statements of McColl’s Retail Group plc (the ‘parent company’) and its 

subsidiaries (the ‘Group’) give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the 
parent company’s affairs as at 25 November 2018 and of the Group’s profit for the 52 week 
period then ended;

•  the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with 

International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the European Union;

•  the parent company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance 

with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice, including Financial 
Reporting Standard 101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework”; and

Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs 
(UK)) and applicable law. Our responsibilities under those standards are further described in 
the auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements section of our report. 

We are independent of the Group and the parent company in accordance with the ethical 
requirements that are relevant to our audit of the financial statements in the UK, including the 
Financial Reporting Council’s (the ‘FRC’s’) Ethical Standard as applied to listed public interest 
entities, and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these 
requirements. We confirm that the non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard 
were not provided to the Group or the parent company.

We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide 
a basis for our opinion.

•  the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of 

Summary of our audit approach

the Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the Group financial statements, Article 4 of the 
IAS Regulation.

We have audited the financial statements which comprise:

•  the consolidated income statement;

•  the consolidated statement of comprehensive income;

•  the consolidated and company statements of financial position;

•  the consolidated and company statements of changes in equity;

•  the consolidated statement of cash flows; and 

•  the related notes 1 to 31 and C1 to C7.

The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the Group 
financial statements is applicable law and IFRSs as adopted by the European Union. 
The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the parent 
company financial statements is applicable law and United Kingdom Accounting Standards, 
including FRS 101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework” (United Kingdom Generally Accepted 
Accounting Practice).

Key audit matters

The key audit matters that we identified in the current year were:

•  Accounting treatment of supplier income;

•  Impairment of goodwill and retail stores;

•  Presentation and classification of results; and 

•  Going concern.

Within this report, any new key audit matters are identified with 
key audit matters which are the same as the prior year identified with 

 and any 

.

Materiality

Scoping

The materiality that we used for the Group financial statements was £1.24m 
which was determined on the basis of 0.10% of revenue of the Group for 
the 52 week period. In the prior year, the basis for materiality was profit 
before tax adjusted for certain items due to their nature and significance; 
due to the trading difficulties faced by the Group in the current year we 
considered revenue to be a more appropriate and stable measure.

The Group consists of a collection of retail stores and operates as a single 
operating segment, entirely within the UK, as disclosed in note 4 to the 
financial statements. The segment was audited as a single component by 
the Group audit team.

Significant changes 
in our approach

Given the difficult trading period experienced by the Group and the 
impact on our work relating to management’s going concern assessment, 
we identified going concern as a new key audit matter this year.

81

Financial statements continued

Independent Auditor’s report to the members of McColl’s Retail Group plc continued

Conclusions relating to going concern, principal risks and viability statement

We confirm that 
we have nothing 
material to 
report, add or 
draw attention 
to in respect of 
these matters.

We confirm that 
we have nothing 
material to 
report, add or 
draw attention 
to in respect of 
these matters.

Going concern 
We have reviewed the Directors’ statement in note 2 to the financial 
statements about whether they considered it appropriate to adopt 
the going concern basis of accounting in preparing them and their 
identification of any material uncertainties to the Group’s and Company’s 
ability to continue to do so over a period of at least 12 months from the 
date of approval of the financial statements. 

We considered as part of our risk assessment the nature of the Group, its 
business model and related risks including where relevant the impact of 
Brexit, the requirements of the applicable financial reporting framework 
and the system of internal control. We evaluated the Directors’ assessment 
of the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern, including challenging 
the underlying data and key assumptions used to make the assessment, 
and evaluated the Directors’ plans for future actions in relation to their 
going concern assessment. See key audit matters.

We are required to state whether we have anything material to add or 
draw attention to in relation to that statement required by Listing Rule 
9.8.6R(3) and report if the statement is materially inconsistent with our 
knowledge obtained in the audit.

Principal risks and viability statement  
Based solely on reading the Directors’ statements and considering 
whether they were consistent with the knowledge we obtained in the 
course of the audit, including the knowledge obtained in the evaluation 
of the Directors’ assessment of the Group’s and the Company’s ability to 
continue as a going concern, we are required to state whether we have 
anything material to add or draw attention to in relation to:

•  the disclosures on pages 34 to 38 that describe the principal risks and 

explain how they are being managed or mitigated;

•  the Directors’ confirmation on page 51 that they have carried out a 
robust assessment of the principal risks facing the Group, including 
those that would threaten its business model, future performance, 
solvency or liquidity; or

•  the Directors’ explanation on page 77 as to how they have assessed 
the prospects of the Group, over what period they have done so and 
why they consider that period to be appropriate, and their statement 
as to whether they have a reasonable expectation that the Group will 
be able to continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due 
over the period of their assessment, including any related disclosures 
drawing attention to any necessary qualifications or assumptions.

We are also required to report whether the Directors’ statement relating 
to the prospects of the Group required by Listing Rule 9.8.6R(3) is materially 
inconsistent with our knowledge obtained in the audit.

82  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most 
significance in our audit of the financial statements of the current period and include the 
most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) that 
we identified. These matters included those which had the greatest effect on: the overall 
audit strategy, the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the 
engagement team.

These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a 
whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on 
these matters.

Accounting treatment of supplier income 

Key audit matter 
description

Supplier income is generated from commercial agreements with suppliers 
including incentives, rebates and discounts. This represents a deduction to 
cost of sales which is material to the Group financial statements. 

During the year, the Group experienced supply disruption as a result of a 
key supplier, Palmer and Harvey, entering into administration in November 
2017. McColl’s had entered into a substantial wholesale supply agreement 
with WM Morrison Supermarkets on 31 July 2017. The supply chain disruption 
meant that McColl’s transition to the new arrangement was accelerated 
compared to the timetable originally planned.

We identified a key audit matter in respect of the accounting treatment 
and disclosures relating to arrangements specific to McColl’s transition  
to the wholesale agreement with Morrison’s, as these involved  
complex elements.

We also identified a key audit matter relating to the ongoing supplier 
income arrangements McColl’s has with its two principal suppliers, 
Morrison’s and Nisa. Judgement is required in determining the period over 
which the reduction in cost of sales should be recognised, requiring both 
a detailed understanding of the contractual arrangements themselves as 
well as complete and accurate source data to which the arrangements 
apply. Our key audit matter focused on judgements around supplier 
income accrued by the Group for amounts that had not been invoiced or 
agreed with suppliers at year end. 

As the process of appropriate recognition in the financial statements can 
involve significant manual adjustments to estimate the level of supplier 
income as at the balance sheet date, these have the potential for 
inappropriate manipulation. We therefore considered this to be a potential 
area for fraud due to the opportunity to manipulate results in the treatment 
of this income.

The costs of sales accounting policy is outlined in note 2 to the financial 
statements. The Audit & Risk Committee has included this as a key risk on 
page 55.

Accounting treatment of supplier income continued 

Key observations

How the scope 
of our audit 
responded to the 
key audit matter

Our audit procedures to address this risk included, but were not limited to:

Transition to the Morrison’s wholesale agreement
•  developing a detailed understanding of the contract terms between 

McColl’s and Morrison’s by reviewing the wholesale agreement 
and evaluating the accounting policies and treatment applied by 
management for supplier income arising from the agreement; 

•  obtaining confirmation from Morrison’s as to the completeness of 

the current and effective contracts and amendments provided to us 
by management;

•  performing a detailed review of disclosures and classification applied 

to supplier income from Morrison’s in the accounts;

•  evaluating the design and implementation of controls in place over 

supplier income;

•  obtaining management’s report on the availability of products from 

the Morrison’s wholesale agreement to perform a recalculation of the 
transitional support payments received and ensuring the classification 
of these payments is appropriate;

•  inspecting a sample of transitional support payments received prior to 

the year end; 

•  for accrued income amounts in respect of Morrison’s at the year end, 

we have obtained evidence as to subsequent invoicing and payment; 
and 

•  reviewing the presentation of the amounts received to assess whether 

these have been appropriately disclosed within the results for 
the period.

Accrued supplier income
•  evaluating the design and implementation of controls in place over 

accrued supplier income;

•  reviewing a statistical sample of supplier income agreement contract 
terms to recalculate the expected supplier income and testing the IT 
controls over system-generated reports relating to supplier income for 
accuracy, validity and completeness; 

•  applying data interrogation tools to perform an analysis to determine 

if any manual adjustments were recorded within the supplier 
income balance; 

•  detailed look back procedures to ensure amounts accrued at the 

previous year end were appropriately invoiced and recovered; and 

•  performing detailed testing on amounts accrued at the year end for 

subsequent invoicing and payment. 

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

The results of our detailed testing in respect of accrued supplier income 
at the year end were satisfactory and we consider the disclosure around 
supplier income to provide a reasonable understanding of the types of 
supplier income received and the impact on the Group’s balance sheet 
and profit as at 25 November 2018.

In respect of the Morrison’s contract we are in agreement that the contract 
has been accounted for appropriately, taking into account the timing 
over which the contributions are recognised. We have also evaluated the 
disclosure of the overall contract and the impact that it has had in the year 
and over the length of the contract. We are satisfied with the accounting 
treatment adopted and the related disclosure.

83

Financial statements continued

Independent Auditor’s report to the members of McColl’s Retail Group plc continued

Impairment of goodwill and retail stores 

Key audit matter 
description

As at 25 November 2018, the Group held £252.7m of goodwill from 
acquisitions of businesses and Groups of stores, in the current year and 
previous years, as disclosed in note 13. 

How the scope 
of our audit 
responded to the 
key audit matter

The Group also held 1557 retail stores, which make up the majority of the 
carrying value of property, plant and equipment held on the balance 
sheet at 25 November 2018 (£92.3m, as disclosed in note 12).

IAS 36 requires that the value of goodwill and retail stores are tested for 
impairment annually or where indicators of impairment are identified.

The value of the stores and goodwill is supported by forecasts of future 
cash flows of the businesses. There is inherent uncertainty within these 
forecasts arising from changing industry and economic conditions and 
thus significant management judgement is required. There is a risk that 
assets held in, and associated with, each store are not recoverable.

The key assumption applied by the Directors in the impairment reviews are:

•  cash flow forecasts in the context of the going concern review, 

including assumptions of future growth, gross margin and store costs;

•  future revenue growth; and 

•  discount rates.

Management performed a full impairment assessment for goodwill and 
the loss-making stores to determine if the carrying value of these assets is 
supported. As a result, a charge of £3.3m has been recorded in respect of 
impairment provisions against property, plant and equipment, as disclosed 
in note 12.

Due to the risk of management bias in the key assumptions input into 
the impairment reviews we consider there to be a potential for fraud in 
respect of this key audit matter. 

Key observations

The Group’s accounting policies are disclosed in note 2 and goodwill is 
included as a key source of estimation uncertainty in note 3. The Audit 
& Risk Committee have considered this risk on page 56.

Our audit procedures to address this risk included, but were not limited to:

•  evaluating the design and implementation of controls around the 

process of preparing and performing the impairment reviews of the 
Group’s goodwill and retail stores;

•  evaluating and challenge management’s impairment models by:

 – reviewing management’s workings for mechanical accuracy and 

compliance with IAS 36;

 – determining an acceptable range for the discount rates applied to 

future cash flow and working with our internal valuation specialists to 
challenge management’s rates; 

 – benchmarking the resulting discount rates against other companies 

operating in the retail sector; 

 – assessing the reasonableness of the assumed growth rates in 

management’s workings;

 – evaluating the third party market value reports received for a 

sample of stores, as data points for the calculation; and 

 – reviewing management’s sensitivity analysis on the inputs applied 
(including discount rates and growth rates) to check that these are 
within a material level of acceptability. 

•  challenging the key assumptions utilised in management’s cash flow 

forecasts by comparing the assumed growth rates, forecast cash flows 
and fair value calculations to recent trading activity, historical trends 
and our understanding of the future prospects of the business; and

•  reviewing the disclosures in the annual report, to assess whether they 

are in line with the requirements of IAS 36.

We have challenged management on a number of the key assumptions, 
particularly the discount rate and allocation of overheads in the store 
impairment model, and note that the impact on the overall assessment of 
store impairment is appropriate.

In respect of goodwill, we are satisfied with the additional disclosure 
provided in the year and the disclosure of the impact on goodwill of 
reasonably possible downside scenarios.

84  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

 
Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Presentation and classification of results 

Key audit matter 
description

Management present adjusted profit excluding items that derive from 
events or transactions that fall within the normal activities of the Group but 
which, individually or, if of a similar type, in aggregate, are excluded from 
the Group’s adjusted profit measure due to their size and nature in order 
to reflect management’s view of the performance of the Group. 

The presentation of income and costs within adjusted measures (to derive 
‘adjusted profit before tax’) under IFRS is judgemental, as IFRS only requires 
the separate presentation of material items.

In the Group’s reported results, significant adjustments have been made  
to statutory profit before tax of £10.5m to derive adjusted profit before 
tax of £7.9m. The Group’s accounting policy for adjusting items can be 
found in note 2. Detail of these adjustments can be found in note 5 of 
the financial statements.

Given their judgemental nature there is a risk that the adjusted items 
should be presented as underlying results. In particular, we focused on 
the judgements relating to the treatment of property profits resulting 
from sale and leaseback activity completed (£11.9m), the costs 
associated with the supplier disruption in the year (£0.9m) and the 
overall treatment of Morrison’s income (£5.4m).

We have identified this key audit matter as a fraud risk as management 
have the opportunity to manipulate results of the business through 
classification of items as adjusting. In addition, we note that the 
calculation for one of the Group’s covenants, Leverage Ratio, is based 
on adjusted profit measures.

The Audit & Risk Committee has included this as a key risk on page 56.

How the scope 
of our audit 
responded to the 
key audit matter

Key observations

Our audit procedures to address this risk included, but were not limited to:

•  evaluating the design and implementation of controls in the 

classification of the results and presentation of these in the accounts;

•  evaluating the appropriateness of the inclusion of items, both 

individually and in aggregate, within adjusted items, this included:

 – assessing the consistency of items year on year; and

 – evaluating adherence to IFRS requirements and latest guidance 

from regulators;

•  report on the total adjusted items and the classification of 

these adjustments;

•  auditing a sample of exceptional income and expenses at year end to 
confirm that items recognised as adjusting meet the relevant definition 
as adjusting;

•  assessing unadjusted items, either highlighted by management or 
identified through the course of our audit, which were regarded as 
significant in nature and/or quantum for whether they should be 
included within adjusted items; 

•  reviewing the quality of earnings to ensure any perceived ‘one-off’ 

debits or credits have been appropriately disclosed; and

•  recalculating the adjusted items and considering the appropriateness 

of related disclosures provided in the annual report.

We have challenged management on the rationale and disclosure for 
the amounts included within adjusting items. We have also challenged 
management and reviewed amounts not included within adjusting items 
for appropriateness. On balance we are satisfied that these have been 
appropriately disclosed and given the appropriate prominence with 
reported numbers. 

85

 
Financial statements continued

Independent Auditor’s report to the members of McColl’s Retail Group plc continued

Going concern 

Key audit matter 
description

Two profit warnings were issued by management throughout the year. 
These were largely driven by the supply disruption caused by the Palmer & 
Harvey collapse in November 2017, contributing significantly to the decline 
in performance year-on-year. The Group’s adjusted profit before tax for the 
period ended 25 November 2018 was £10.5m (2017: £26.3m). 

Given the key financial covenant conditions on the Group’s funding 
facilities are linked to adjusted EBITDA, there is an increased risk that the 
business may fail to comply with the required covenant conditions and 
continue to operate as a going concern.

Management have performed an analysis of future trading  
performance and determined the impact of this performance  
on future covenant requirements.

Management have also prepared a downside scenario for the business 
plan that models changes in the forecast performance to test how resilient 
the business is to these, including in the event of a no-deal Brexit, and what 
mitigating actions may be required to rectify forecast loss of headroom.

The Audit & Risk Committee has included the adoption of the going 
concern basis of accounting as a key risk on page 56, see also 
management’s going concern disclosure in the Director’s report on page 
77 and note 2 to the financial statements.

How the scope 
of our audit 
responded to the 
key audit matter

Key observations

Our audit procedures to address this risk included, but were not limited to:

•  assessing the design and implementation of the controls in place 

around the preparation of managements going concern assessment;

•  obtaining an understanding of the financing facilities, including the 
nature of the facilities, repayment terms, covenants and attached 
conditions and any amendments to the facilities; 

•  obtaining and challenging management’s documented assessment 

of going concern and the underlying workings to support 
their conclusion; 

•  challenging management’s assessment of a reasonable downside 

and Brexit scenario for their going concern assessment that included 
consideration for the impact on availability of products and gross 
margin as experienced during 2018; 

•  assessing the facility and covenant headroom calculations, and 
performing sensitivities on each of management’s base case, 
downside and ‘no-deal Brexit’ scenarios;

•  challenging the appropriateness of management’s forecasts by 

testing their mechanical accuracy, assessing historical forecasting 
accuracy and understanding management’s consideration of 
downside sensitivity analysis;

•  considered the consistency of management’s forecasts with other 

areas of the audit, such as the impairment financial models and the 
forecasts underpinning the viability statement; and

•  reviewed the wording of the going concern disclosures, and assessed 

its consistency with management’s forecasts.

Management have provided detailed disclosures, including the impact of 
an unfavourable Brexit outcome on their going concern assumption, along 
with the mitigating actions that are available to them should the impact 
be more severe than is anticipated. We are satisfied that Management 
have performed appropriate sensitivities, including combined sensitivities 
which are reasonably possible, and disclosed the impact this may have on 
covenants and the need for appropriate action by Management. 

86  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Our application of materiality
We define materiality as the magnitude of misstatement in the financial statements that 
makes it probable that the economic decisions of a reasonably knowledgeable person 
would be changed or influenced. We use materiality both in planning the scope of our audit 
work and in evaluating the results of our work. 

An overview of the scope of our audit
The Group business consists of a collection of retail stores and operates as a single 
operating segment, entirely within the UK, as defined in note 4 to the financial statements. 
The financial results of the Group are aggregated at a consolidated level without the need for 
consolidation adjustments to account for eliminations between Group statutory companies. 

Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements 
as a whole as follows:

Materiality

£1,240,000 (2017: £1,240,000)

£744,000 (2017: £154,000)

Group financial statements

Parent company  
financial statements

Therefore we identified only one reporting component being the Group itself, which includes 
the parent company audit (which we audit to a lower materiality level), on which we perform 
our audit using a single audit team. 

The Parent company 
materiality equates to 1.5% of 
net assets, which is capped at 
35% of Group materiality.

As a holding company, we 
considered net assets to be 
the most appropriate measure 
of the parent company’s 
performance.

Basis for determining 
materiality

0.10% of revenue

Rationale for the 
benchmark applied

We considered a number 
of different measures and 
concluded that revenue is 
the most stable year on year 
measure for determining 
materiality; this reflects the 
overall size of the business, 
which is largely consistent 
year on year, although profit 
margins have decreased. In 
the prior year, we used 4.7% 
of adjusted pre-tax profit. The 
materiality applied in the prior 
was equivalent to 0.11% of that 
year’s revenue.

We agreed with the Audit & Risk Committee that we would report to the Committee all 
audit differences in excess of £62,000 (2017: £62,000), as well as differences below that 
threshold that, in our view, warranted reporting on qualitative grounds. We also report to the 
Audit & Risk Committee on disclosure matters that we identified when assessing the overall 
presentation of the financial statements.

87

Financial statements continued

Independent Auditor’s report to the members of McColl’s Retail Group plc continued

Other information

The Directors are responsible for the other information. The other 
information comprises the information included in the annual report 
including the Strategic and Governance Reports, other than the financial 
statements and our auditor’s report thereon.

We have nothing 
to report in 
respect of these 
matters.

Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other 
information and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in our 
report, we do not express any form of assurance conclusion thereon.

In connection with our audit of the financial statements, our responsibility  
is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the 
other information is materially inconsistent with the financial statements  
or our knowledge obtained in the audit or otherwise appears to be 
materially misstated.

If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material 
misstatements, we are required to determine whether there is a material 
misstatement in the financial statements or a material misstatement of the 
other information. If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude 
that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are 
required to report that fact.

In this context, matters that we are specifically required to report to you 
as uncorrected material misstatements of the other information include 
where we conclude that:

•  Fair, balanced and understandable – the statement given by the 

Directors that they consider the annual report and financial statements 
taken as a whole is fair, balanced and understandable and provides 
the information necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s 
position and performance, business model and strategy, is materially 
inconsistent with our knowledge obtained in the audit; or

•  Audit & Risk Committee reporting – the section describing the work of 
the Audit & Risk Committee does not appropriately address matters 
communicated by us to the Audit & Risk Committee; or

•  Directors’ statement of compliance with the UK Corporate Governance 
Code – the parts of the Directors’ statement required under the Listing 
Rules relating to the Company’s compliance with the UK Corporate 
Governance Code containing provisions specified for review by the 
auditor in accordance with Listing Rule 9.8.10R(2) do not properly 
disclose a departure from a relevant provision of the UK Corporate 
Governance Code.

88  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Responsibilities of Directors
As explained more fully in the Directors’ responsibilities statement, the Directors are responsible 
for the preparation of the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true 
and fair view, and for such internal control as the Directors determine is necessary to enable 
the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due 
to fraud or error.

In preparing the financial statements, the Directors are responsible for assessing the Group’s 
and the parent company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing as applicable, 
matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting unless the 
Directors either intend to liquidate the Group or the parent company or to cease operations, 
or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements 
as a whole are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an 
auditor’s report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, 
but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always 
detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error 
and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably 
be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these 
financial statements.

Details of the extent to which the audit was considered capable of detecting irregularities, 
including fraud are set out below.

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located 
on the FRC’s website at: www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of 
our auditor’s report.

Extent to which the audit was considered capable of detecting irregularities,  
including fraud
We identify and assess the risks of material misstatement of the financial statements, whether 
due to fraud or error, and then design and perform audit procedures responsive to those risks, 
including obtaining audit evidence that is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for 
our opinion.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Identifying and assessing potential risks related to irregularities
In identifying and assessing risks of material misstatement in respect of irregularities, including 
fraud and non-compliance with laws and regulations, our procedures included the following:

•  enquiring of management and the Audit & Risk Committee, including obtaining and 

reviewing supporting documentation, concerning the Group’s policies and procedures 
relating to:

 – identifying, evaluating and complying with laws and regulations and whether they were 

aware of any instances of non-compliance;

 – detecting and responding to the risks of fraud and whether they have knowledge of any 

actual, suspected or alleged fraud; 

 – the internal controls established to mitigate risks related to fraud or non-compliance with 

laws and regulations.

•  discussing among the engagement team and involving relevant internal specialists, 

including tax, valuations, pensions, and IT, regarding how and where fraud might occur 
in the financial statements and any potential indicators of fraud. As part of this discussion, 
we identified potential for fraud as bias in estimates, judgements, and inappropriate 
adjustments in the accounting treatment of supplier income, assessment of the impairment 
of goodwill and retail stores and the presentation and classification of results; and

•  obtaining an understanding of the legal and regulatory framework that the Group 

operates in, focusing on those laws and regulations that had a direct effect on the financial 
statements or that had a fundamental effect on the operations of the Group. The key laws 
and regulations we considered in this context included the UK Companies Act, Listing Rules, 
pensions legislation and tax legislation.

Audit response to risks identified
As a result of performing the above, we identified the accounting treatment of supplier 
income, presentation and classification of results, and accounting for goodwill and store 
impairment as key audit matters. The key audit matters section of our report explains the 
matters in more detail and also describes the specific procedures we performed in response 
to those key audit matters. 

Our procedures to respond to risks identified included the following:

•  reviewing the financial statement disclosures and testing to supporting documentation to 

assess compliance with relevant laws and regulations discussed above;

•  enquiring of management, the Audit & Risk Committee and external legal counsel 

concerning actual and potential litigation and claims;

•  performing analytical procedures to identify any unusual or unexpected relationships that 

may indicate risks of material misstatement due to fraud;

•  reading minutes of meetings of those charged with governance, reviewing internal audit 

reports and reviewing correspondence with HMRC; and

•  in addressing the risk of fraud through management override of controls, testing the 
appropriateness of journal entries and other adjustments; assessing whether the 
judgements made in making accounting estimates are indicative of a potential bias; and 
evaluating the business rationale of any significant transactions that are unusual or outside 
the normal course of business.

We also communicated relevant identified laws and regulations and potential fraud risks 
to all engagement team members including internal specialists, and remained alert to any 
indications of fraud or non-compliance with laws and regulations throughout the audit.

89

Financial statements continued

Independent Auditor’s report to the members of McColl’s Retail Group plc continued

Report on other legal and regulatory requirements

Other matters

Opinions on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006
In our opinion the part of the Directors’ remuneration report to be audited has been properly 
prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.

In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit:

•  the information given in the strategic report and the Directors’ report for the financial year 
for which the financial statements are prepared is consistent with the financial statements; 
and

•  the strategic report and the Directors’ report have been prepared in accordance with 

applicable legal requirements.

In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the Group and of the parent company 
and their environment obtained in the course of the audit, we have not identified any 
material misstatements in the strategic report or the Directors’ report.

Matters on which we are required to report by exception

Adequacy of explanations received and accounting records
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our 
opinion:

•  we have not received all the information and explanations we require 

We have nothing 
to report in 
respect of these 
matters.

for our audit; or

•  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent 

company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received 
from branches not visited by us; or

•  the parent company financial statements are not in agreement with 

the accounting records and returns.

Directors’ remuneration
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are also required to report if in our 
opinion certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration have not been 
made or the part of the Directors’ remuneration report to be audited is not 
in agreement with the accounting records and returns.

We have nothing 
to report in 
respect of these 
matters.

Auditor tenure
Following the recommendation of the Audit & Risk Committee, we were appointed by the 
Board of Directors on 3 February 2014 to audit the financial statements for the year ending 
2014 and subsequent financial periods. The entity was listed on the London Stock Exchange 
on 28 February 2014. The period of total uninterrupted engagement including previous 
renewals and reappointments of the firm is 5 years, covering the years ending 2014 to 2018.

Prior to 2014, we were appointed by the Board of Directors on 1 October 2006 to audit the 
financial statements for the year ending 2006 and subsequent financial periods of McColl’s 
Retail Group Ltd which was previously the parent company to the Group. The period of total 
uninterrupted engagement including previous renewals and reappointments of the firm was 
13 years, covering the years ending 2006 to 2018.

Consistency of the audit report with the additional report to the Audit & Risk Committee
Our audit opinion is consistent with the additional report to the Audit & Risk Committee we 
are required to provide in accordance with ISAs (UK).

Use of our report
This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with 
Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that 
we might state to the Company’s members those matters we are required to state to them 
in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do 
not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the Company and the Company’s 
members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

Sukhbinder Kooner, (Senior statutory auditor)  
For and on behalf of Deloitte LLP  
Statutory Auditor 
London, UK 
17 February 2019

90  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Consolidated income statement
for the 52 week period from 27 November 2017 to 25 November 2018

Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross profit
Administrative expenses
Other operating income
Profits arising on property-related items

Operating profit
Finance income
Finance costs

Net finance cost

Profit before tax
Income tax (expense)/receipt

Profit for the period

Earnings per share (pence)
Diluted Earnings per share (pence)

Note

4

4

6

4

8

9

11
11

Adjusted 
2018 
£’000

1,241,539
(919,003)

322,536
(311,442)
6,811
416

18,321

–
(7,859)

(7,859)

10,462
(2,778)

7,684

6.67p
6.66p

Adjusting 
items  
2018
Note 5 
£’000

–
(1,428)

(1,428)
(7,118)
–
6,109

(2,437)

–
(158)

(158)

(2,595)
1,762

(833)

Total 
2018 
£’000

1,241,539
(920,431)

321,108
(318,560)
6,811
6,525

15,884

–
(8,017)

(8,017)

7,867
(1,016)

6,851

5.95p
5.94p

Adjusted 
restated  
2017 
£’000

1,148,747
(841,370)

307,377
(286,889)
7,787
3,110

31,385

93
(5,200)

(5,107)

26,278
(5,228)

21,050

18.28p
18.19p

The above results were derived from continuing operations.

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
for the 52 week period from 27 November 2017 to 25 November 2018

Profit for the period

Items that will not be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss
Remeasurement of defined benefit pension scheme
Tax on defined benefit pension scheme

Total comprehensive income for the period

Adjusting 
items  
2017
Note 5 
£’000

–

–
(3,730)
–
(2,621)

(6,351)

–
(1,521)

(1,521)

(7,872)
1,014

(6,858)

2018  
£’000

6,851

859
(150)

7,560

Total 
restated  
2017 
£’000

1,148,747
(841,370)

307,377
(290,619)
7,787
489

25,034

93
(6,721)

(6,628)

18,406
(4,214)

14,192

12.32p
12.26p

2017  
£’000

14,192

3,039
(517)

16,714

91

Equity
Share capital
Share premium
Retained earnings

Total Equity

Note

25
25

2018 
£’000

2017 
£’000

(115)
(12,580)
(128,785)

(141,480)

(115)
(12,579)
(133,214)

(145,908)

These financial statements of McColl’s Retail Group, registered number 08783477, were 
approved and authorised for issue by the Board on 17 February 2019 and signed on its 
behalf by:

Robbie Bell
Director

Financial statements continued

Consolidated statement of financial position
as at 25 November 2018

Note

2018 
£’000

2017 
£’000

12
13
24
28
14

16
17
18

19
20

23

20

23
24
28

92,314
252,747
97
14,122
36

359,316

77,146
41,984
28,547
–

147,677

506,993

(213,337)
(2,148)
(673)
(4,627)

–

(220,785)

(73,108)

(124,989)
(9,552)
(1,042)
(6,895)
(2,250)

(144,728)

(365,513)

141,480

103,565
248,899
172
13,609
36

366,281

75,965
39,810
14,273
581

130,629

496,910

(163,670)
(1,799)
(2,633)
(4,508)

(830)

(173,440)

(42,811)

(154,722)
(10,367)
(593)
(8,528)
(3,352)

(177,562)

(351,002)

145,908

Assets
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment
Intangible assets
Deferred tax assets
Retirement benefit asset
Investments

Total non-current assets

Current assets
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
Assets in disposal groups classified as held for sale

Total current assets

Total assets

Equity and liabilities
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables
Loans and borrowings
Income tax liability
Provisions
Liabilities directly associated with assets classified as 
held for sale

Total current liabilities 

Net current liabilities

Non-current liabilities
Loans and borrowings
Other payables
Provisions
Deferred tax liabilities
Retirement benefit obligations

Total non-current liabilities 

Total liabilities 

Net assets 

92  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Consolidated statement of changes in equity
for the 52 week period from 27 November 2017 to 25 November 2018

Consolidated statement of cash flows
for the 52 week period from 27 November 2017 to 25 November 2018

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

As at 27 November 2017

Profit for the period
Remeasurement of 
defined benefit pension 
scheme

Total comprehensive 
income
Dividends
New share capital 
subscribed
Deferred tax

As at 25 November 
2018

As at 28 November 2016

Profit for the period
Remeasurement 
of defined benefit 
pension scheme

Total comprehensive 
income
Dividends
Share-based payment 
transactions

As at 26 November 2017

Note

Share  
capital  
£’000

Share  
premium  

£’000

Retained 
earnings  

£’000

Total  
equity  
£’000

115

12,579

133,214

145,908

–

–

–
–

–
–

–

–

–
–

1
–

6,851

6,851

709

709

7,560
(11,862)

7,560
(11,862)

–
(127)

1
(127)

115

12,580

128,785

141,480

Share  
capital  
£’000

115

Share  
premium  
£’000

12,579

–

–

–
–

–

–

–

–
–

–

115

12,579

Retained 
earnings  
£’000

127,812

14,192

Total  
equity  
£’000

140,506

14,192

2,522

2,522

16,714
(11,748)

436

133,214

16,714
(11,748)

436

145,908

10

24

Note

10

Cash flows from operating activities
Profit for the period
Adjustments to cash flows from non-cash items
Depreciation and amortisation
Profit on disposal of property plant and equipment
Finance income
Finance costs
Share-based payment transactions
Income tax expense
Impairment losses

Increase in inventories
Increase in trade and other receivables
Increase in trade and other payables
Decrease in retirement benefit obligation net of 
actuarial changes
Increase in provisions

Cash generated from operations
Income taxes paid

Net cash flow from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities
Interest received
Acquisitions of property, plant and equipment
Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment
Acquisition of businesses, net of cash acquired

Net cash flows from investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities
Interest paid
Proceeds from issue of ordinary shares, 
net of issue costs
Repayment of bank borrowing
New bank borrowing
Payment of finance lease creditors
Interest payment to finance lease creditor
Dividends paid

Net cash flows from financing activities

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period

Cash and cash equivalents at end of period

Note

2018 
£’000

2017 
£’000

6,851

14,192

6
6
8
8
29
9

16

28
23

8

21
21

8
10

17,054
(14,994)
–
8,017
–
1,016
3,297

21,241
(737)
(1,593)
48,082

(906)
568

66,655
(4,811)

61,844

–
(21,295)
27,410
(4,513)

1,602

15,636
(489)
(93)
6,721
436
4,214
746

41,363
(20,924)
(3,970)
40,562

(1,633)
3,089

58,487
(4,267)

54,220

93
(25,655)
7,622
(122,409)

(140,349)

(7,928)

(6,327)

1
(29,000)
–
(235)
(148)
(11,862)

(49,172)

14,274
14,273

28,547

–
(37,000)
154,500
(2,506)
(274)
(11,748)

96,645

10,516
3,757

14,273

93

 
 
Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements
for the 52 week period from 27 November 2017 to 25 November 2018

1 General information
The Group is a public company limited by share capital, incorporated in England and Wales 
and domiciled in United Kingdom.

McColl’s Retail Group plc  
McColl’s House 
Ashwells Road  
Brentwood  
Essex 
CM15 9ST 
United Kingdom

Principal activity
The Group engages in one principal area of activity, as an operator of convenience 
and newsagent stores.

2 Accounting policies 

Basis of preparation
The Group financial statements for 2018 consolidate the financial statements of McColl’s 
Retail Group plc (the ‘Company’) and all its subsidiary undertakings (together, “the Group”) 
drawn up to 25 November 2018. Acquisitions are accounted for under the acquisition method 
of accounting.

The Group financial statements have been prepared on the going concern basis and in 
accordance with IFRS and IFRS Interpretations Committee (IFRIC) interpretations, as adopted 
by the European Union and with those parts of the Companies Act 2006 applicable to 
companies reported under IFRS. The Group’s going concern position is set out in the Directors’ 
report section on page 77.

The consolidated financial information is presented in sterling, the Group’s functional 
currency, and has been rounded to the nearest thousand (£’000). The prior period was 
also a 52 week period.

The preparation of financial information in compliance with adopted IFRS requires the use 
of certain critical judgements, estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts 
of assets and liabilities at the date of the financial information and the reported amounts of 
revenues and expenses during the reporting period. It also requires Group management to 
exercise judgement in applying the Group’s accounting policies.

The estimates and associated assumptions are based on historical experience and various 
other factors that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances, the results of which 
form the basis of making the judgements about carrying values of assets and liabilities that 
are not readily apparent from other sources. Actual results may differ from these estimates. 
The areas involving a higher degree of judgement or complexity, or areas where assumptions 
and estimates are significant to the financial information, are disclosed in note 3.

94  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Basis of measurement
The consolidated financial information has been prepared on a historical cost basis,  
except for net defined benefit pension asset or liability, (refer to individual accounting  
policy for details).

Basis of consolidation
The Group financial statements consolidate the financial statements of the Company and its 
subsidiary undertakings drawn up to 25 November 2018.

The results of subsidiaries acquired or disposed of during the period are included in the 
consolidated income statement from the effective date of acquisition or up to effective date 
of disposal, as appropriate.

Business combinations
On acquisition, the assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities are measured at their fair values 
at the date of acquisition.

Any excess of the cost of acquisition over the fair value of the identifiable net assets 
acquired, including separately identifiable assets, is recognised as goodwill. Any discount 
on acquisition, i.e. where the cost of acquisition is below the fair values of the identifiable net 
assets acquired, is credited to the income statement in the period of acquisition.

Changes in accounting policy

New standards, interpretations and amendments not yet effective
The following newly issued but not yet effective standards, interpretations and amendments, 
which have not been applied in these financial statements, will or may have an effect on the 
Company financial statements in future:

IFRS 9 ‘Financial Instruments’
IFRS 9 ‘Financial Instruments’ replaces IAS 39 ‘Recognition and Measurement’. The standard 
was published in July 2014 and is effective for the Group from the period commencing 
26 November 2018.

The standard is applicable to financial assets and financial liabilities, the main changes it 
introduces are:

•  new requirements for the classification and measurement of financial assets and 

financial liabilities;

•  a new model based on expected credit losses for recognising provisions; and
•  provides for simplified hedge accounting by aligning hedge accounting more closely 

with an entity’s risk management methodology.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Management have assessed the impact of the above changes and believes that the 
adoption of IFRS 9 will not have a material impact on its accounting policies or classification 
and measurement of financial instruments.

The Group will apply the modified retrospective approach to transition and will not restate any 
comparative amounts. Any transition differences will be recognised as an adjustment to the 
opening balance sheet.

IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from Contracts with Customers’
IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from Contracts with Customers’ replaces IAS 18 ‘Revenue’ and IAS 11 
‘Construction Contracts’. The standard was published in May 2014 and is effective for the 
Group from the period commencing 26 November 2018. It applies to all contracts with 
customers, except those in the scope of other standards.

The standard establishes a principles based approach for revenue recognition and is based 
on the concept of recognising revenue for obligations only when they are satisfied and the 
control of goods or services is transferred.

Management have performed an assessment of the impact of IFRS 15 and believes the 
adoption will not have a material impact on its consolidated financial statements.

The Group will apply the modified retrospective approach to transition and will not restate any 
comparative amounts. Any transition differences will be recognised as an adjustment to the 
opening balance sheet.

IFRS 16 ‘Leases’
IFRS 16 ‘Leases’ replaces IAS 17 ‘Leases’. The standard was published in January 2016 and is 
effective for the Group from the period commencing 25 November 2019.

The standard represents a significant change in the accounting and reporting of leases 
for lessees. The standard provides a single lessee accounting model, and as such, requires 
lessees to recognise a right-of-use assets and lease liabilities for all leases unless the underlying 
asset has a low value or the lease term is 12 months or less.

The Group has a portfolio of over 1,600 property leases and the accounting treatment for 
each lease will change significantly.

Accounting requirements for lessors are substantially unchanged from IAS 17 and therefore 
there is no material impact to the Group consolidated financial statements.

The standard offers two different transition methods and both result in significant changes to 
income statement, balance sheet and disclosure. Management are assessing the transition 
methods in conjunction with reviewing our current data and new systems processes.

Management continues to assess the impact of IFRS 16 and has therefore not concluded on 
which transition method to follow as yet. As such it is not practicable to quantify the impact of 
IFRS 16. From work performed to date, it is expected that implementation of the new standard 
will have a substantial impact on the income statement, balance sheet and the alternative 
performance measures used by the Group.

In addition to the above new standards or amendments, there are additional new standards 
and amendments which have not been listed. None of the other standards, interpretations 
and amendments which are effective for periods beginning on or after 26 November 2018 
and which have not been adopted early, are expected to have a material effect on the 
consolidated financial statements.

Alternative Performance Measures
In reporting financial information, the Directors have presented various Alternative 
Performance Measures (APMs) of financial performance, position or cash flows, which are not 
defined or specified under the requirements of International Financial Reporting Standards 
IFRS. On the basis that these measures are not defined by IFRS, they may not be directly 
comparable with other companies’ APMs, including those in the Group’s industry.

The Group believes that these APMs, which are not considered to be a substitute for or 
superior to IFRS measures, provide stakeholders with additional useful information on the 
performance of the business. These APMs are consistent with how the business performance is 
planned, reported and analysed between reporting periods within the internal management 
reporting to the Board. Some of these measures are also used for the purpose of setting 
remuneration targets (and covenant calculations).

The key APMs that the Group uses include: adjusted EBITDA, adjusted profit before tax, like-for-
like sales (LFL), net debt and adjusted earnings per share. Each of the APMs, and others used 
by the Group, are set out in the Glossary including explanations of how they are calculated 
and how they can be reconciled to a statutory measure where relevant. These measures 
have remained consistent with the prior year.

The Group makes certain adjustments to the statutory profit measures in order to derive many 
of these APMs. The Group’s policy is to exclude items that are considered to be significant 
in nature and/or quantum. Treatment as an adjusting items provides stakeholders with 
additional useful information to assess the annual trading performance of the Group.

Revenue recognition
Revenue represents the amounts receivable for goods and services sold through retail outlets 
in the period which fall within the Group’s principal activities, stated net of value added tax. 
Revenue is shown net of returns. Revenue is recognised when the significant risks and rewards 
of goods and services have been passed to the buyer and can be measured reliably.

95

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 27 November 2017 to 25 November 2018

2 Accounting policies continued
Commission from the sale of lottery tickets, travel tickets, electronic phone top-ups and 
products sold through the Post Office in store is recognised net within turnover, when 
transactions deriving commissions are completed, as the Group acts as an agent.

In the opinion of the Directors, the Group engages in one principal area of activity, that 
of operators of convenience and newsagent stores. Turnover is derived entirely from the 
United Kingdom.

Cost of sales
Cost of sales consists of all direct costs to the point of sale including warehouse and 
transportation costs. Supplier incentives, rebates and discounts are recognised as a credit to 
cost of sales in the period in which the stock to which the discounts apply is sold. The accrued 
value at the reporting date is included in prepayments and accrued income.

Adjusting items
Adjusting items relate to costs or incomes that derive from events or transactions that fall 
within the normal activities of the Group, but are excluded from the Group’s adjusted profit 
before tax measure, individually or, if of a similar type in aggregate, due to their size and 
nature in order to better reflect management’s view of the performance of the Group. 
The adjusted profit before tax measure (profit before adjusting items) is not a recognised profit 
measure under IFRS and may not be directly comparable with adjusted profit measures used 
by other companies. Details of adjusting items are set out in note 5.

Other operating income
Rental income and ATM commissions are recognised in the consolidated income statement 
when the services to which they relate are earned.

Tax
The tax expense for the period comprises current tax. Tax is recognised in profit or loss, 
except that a change attributable to an item of income or expense recognised as other 
comprehensive income is also recognised directly in other comprehensive income.

Current tax is provided at amounts expected to be paid using the tax rates and laws that 
have been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. Current tax is 
charged or credited to the income statement, except when it relates to items charged to 
equity or other comprehensive income, in which case the current tax is also dealt with in 
equity or other comprehensive income respectively.

Deferred tax is accounted for on the basis of temporary differences arising from differences 
between the tax base and accounting base of assets and liabilities.

96  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Deferred tax is recognised for all temporary differences, except to the extent where a 
deferred tax liability arises from the initial recognition of goodwill or from the initial recognition 
of an asset or a liability in a transaction that is not a business combination and, at the time 
of the transaction, affects neither accounting profit nor taxable profit. It is determined using 
tax rates and laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet 
date and are expected to apply when the related deferred income tax asset is realised or the 
deferred income tax liability is settled.

Deferred tax assets are recognised only to the extent that the Directors consider that, on the 
basis of all available evidence, it is probable that there will be suitable future taxable profits 
from which the future reversal of the underlying differences can be deducted.

Deferred tax is charged or credited to the income statement, except when it relates to items 
charged or credited directly to equity or other comprehensive income, in which case the 
deferred tax is also dealt with in equity or other comprehensive income respectively.

Property, plant and equipment
Tangible fixed assets are stated at cost net of accumulated depreciation and any provision 
for impairment. Cost includes the original purchase price of the asset and the costs incurred 
attributable to bringing the asset to its working condition for intended use.

Depreciation
Depreciation is provided so as to write off the cost of tangible fixed assets less their estimated 
residual values on a straight-line basis over the expected useful economic lives of the assets 
concerned. Principal rates used for this purpose are as follows:

Asset class

Land and buildings:

Depreciation method and rate

Freehold (including land where it is not separately identifiable)

Straight-line basis: 50 years

Long leaseholds improvements

Land (if separately identifiable)

Straight-line basis: 50 years

Nil

Short leaseholds improvements – Shops & Other 

Straight-line basis: 10 years

Leasehold premiums

Furniture, fittings & equipment:

Motor vehicles

Computer equipment

Furniture and fittings

Straight-line basis: the unexpired 
portion of the lease

Straight-line basis: 4 years

Straight-line basis: 5 years

Straight-line basis: 10 years

Gains and losses on disposal of any fixed assets are determined by comparing proceeds with 
the asset’s carrying amount and are recognised within operating profit.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Fixed asset impairments
At each reporting date, the Group reviews the carrying amounts of its property, plant and 
equipment and intangible assets to determine whether there is any indication that those 
assets have suffered an impairment loss. If any such indication exists, the recoverable amount 
of the asset, which is the higher of its fair value less costs to sell and its value in use, is estimated 
in order to determine the extent of the impairment loss. Where the asset does not generate 
cash flows that are independent from other assets, the Group estimates the recoverable 
amount of the cash generating unit (CGU) to which the asset belongs. For property, plant and 
equipment and intangible assets excluding goodwill, the CGU is deemed to be each trading 
store. Any resulting impairment is charged to administrative expenses.

Intangible assets impairment
For the purposes of impairment testing, goodwill is allocated to each of the Group’s cash 
generating units (CGUs) expected to benefit from the synergies of the combination. CGUs to 
which goodwill has been allocated are tested for impairment annually, or more frequently 
when there is an indication that the unit may be impaired. If the recoverable amount of 
the CGU is less than the carrying amount of the unit, the impairment loss is allocated first 
to reduce the carrying amount of any goodwill allocated to the unit and then to the other 
assets of the unit pro-rata on the basis of the carrying amount of each asset in the unit. 
An impairment loss recognised for goodwill is not reversed in a subsequent period.

Non-current assets held for sale
Non-current assets are classified as assets held for sale only if available for immediate sale in 
their present condition, a sale is highly probable and expected to be completed within one 
period from the date of classification. Such assets are measured at the lower of the carrying 
amount and fair value less costs to sell and are not depreciated or amortised.

Leased assets
Leases are classified as finance leases when the terms of the lease transfer substantially all the 
risks and rewards of ownership to the Group. All other leases are classified as operating leases. 
For property leases, the land and building elements are treated separately to determine the 
appropriate lease classification.

Finance leases/hire purchase contracts
Assets funded through finance leases or hire purchase contracts are capitalised as property, 
plant and equipment and depreciated over their estimated useful lives or the lease term, 
whichever is shorter. The amount capitalised is the lower of the fair value of the asset or the 
present value of the minimum lease payments during the lease term at the inception of 
the lease. The resulting lease obligations are included in liabilities net of finance charges. 
Finance costs on finance leases are charged directly to the income statement so as to 
produce a constant periodic rate of interest.

Operating leases
Assets leased under operating leases are not recorded on the balance sheet. 
Rental payments are charged directly to the income statement on a straight-line basis 
over the lease term.

Sale and leaseback
A sale and leaseback transaction is one where a vendor sells an asset and immediately 
reacquires the use of that asset by entering into a lease with the buyer. The accounting 
treatment of the sale and leaseback depends upon the substance of the transaction 
and whether or not the sale was made at the asset’s fair value. For sale and finance 
leasebacks, any apparent profit or loss from the sale is deferred and amortised over the 
lease term. For sale and operating leasebacks, generally the assets are sold at fair value, and 
accordingly the profit or loss from the sale is recognised immediately in the income statement.

Following initial recognition, the lease treatment is consistent with those principles 
described above.

Lease incentives
Lease incentives primarily include up-front cash payments or rent-free periods. Where lease 
incentives relate to the whole term of the contract lease incentives are capitalised and 
spread over the period of the lease term.

Leases with predetermined fixed rental increases
Where a lease has predetermined fixed rental increases, these rental increases are 
accounted for on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease.

Operating lease income
Operating lease income consists of rentals from sub-tenant agreements and is recognised 
as earned.

Goodwill
Goodwill represents the excess of the fair value of the consideration of an acquisition over the 
fair value of the Group’s share of the net identifiable assets of the acquired subsidiary at the 
date of acquisition. Goodwill is recognised as an asset on the Group’s balance sheet in the 
year in which it arises. Goodwill is not amortised but is tested for impairment at least annually 
and is stated at cost less any provision for impairment. Any impairment is recognised in the 
income statement and is not reversed in a subsequent period.

See note 13 for further details of CGUs and impairment testing.

97

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 27 November 2017 to 25 November 2018

2 Accounting policies continued

Other intangible assets
Other intangible assets includes computer software. Computer software is stated at cost less 
accumulated amortisation and any provision for impairment. Externally acquired computer 
software and software licences and costs relating to development of computer software for 
internal use (to the extent that they meet the recognition criteria of IAS 38 Intangible Assets) 
are capitalised and amortised on a straight-line basis over their useful economic lives of 
five years and are included within other intangible assets. Costs relating to development 
of computer software for internal use that do not meet the IAS 38 recognition criteria are 
expensed as incurred.

Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents includes cash in hand, cash in transit, deposits held at call with 
banks, other short-term highly liquid investments with original maturities of three months or less.

When drawn, bank overdrafts are shown within loans and borrowings in current liabilities in the 
Group balance sheet.

Trade receivables
Trade receivables are amounts due from customers for goods and services performed in 
the ordinary course of business. If collection is expected in one year or less (or in the normal 
operating cycle of the business if longer), they are classified as current assets. If not, they are 
presented as non-current assets.

Trade receivables are recognised initially at the transaction price. A provision for the 
impairment of trade receivables is established when there is objective evidence that the 
Group will not be able to collect all amounts due according to the original terms of the 
receivables. The amount of any loss is recognised in the income statement.

Inventories
Inventories consist of goods for resale and are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable 
value. Cost is calculated using the retail method for each category of stock by reducing the 
net selling price by the attributable average gross margin. Net realisable value is the price at 
which the stocks can be realised in the normal course of business net of selling and distribution 
costs. Provision is made for obsolete, slow-moving or defective items where appropriate.

Trade payables
Trade payables are obligations to pay for goods or services that have been acquired in the 
ordinary course of business from suppliers. Trade payables are classified as current liabilities 
if payment is due within one year or less (or in the normal operating cycle of the business if 
longer). If not, they are presented as non-current liabilities.

98  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Trade payables are recorded initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised 
cost. Generally this results in their recognition at their nominal value.

Borrowings
All borrowings are initially recorded at the amount of proceeds received, net of transaction 
costs. Borrowings are subsequently carried at amortised cost, with the difference between the 
proceeds, net of transaction costs, and the amount due on redemption being recognised as 
a charge to the income statement over the period of the relevant borrowing.

Interest expense is recognised on the basis of the effective interest method and is included in 
finance costs.

Borrowings are classified as current liabilities unless the Group has an unconditional right to 
defer settlement of the liability for at least 12 months after the reporting date.

Provisions
The Group recognises provisions for liabilities of uncertain timing or amounts, including those 
for onerous leases, leasehold dilapidations and legal disputes. Provisions are recognised 
when there is a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of a past event, for which it 
is probable that an outflow of economic benefit will be required to settle the obligation, and 
where the amount of the obligation can be reliably estimated. Provisions are measured at 
the present value of the best estimate of expenditures expected to be required to settle the 
obligation using a pre-tax rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of 
money and the risks specific to the obligation. The increase in the provision due to passage 
of time is recognised as interest expense.

Onerous contracts/leases
The Group compares the unavoidable costs of all leases with the expected economic 
benefits on a store by store basis. Once a lease is considered onerous, a provision is 
calculated based on the present value of the unavoidable costs net of expected benefits.

Dilapidations
Provisions for dilapidations and similar contractual property costs are recognised on a lease-
by-lease basis when the need for expenditure has been identified, being the point at which 
the likely expenditure can be reliably estimated.

Contingent liabilities
Contingent liabilities are possible obligations whose existence will be confirmed only on the 
occurrence or non-occurrence of uncertain future events outside the Group’s control, or 
present obligations that are not recognised because it is not probable that a settlement will 
be required or the value of such a payment cannot be reliably estimated. The Group does 
not recognise contingent liabilities but discloses them. Refer to note 26 for the disclosures.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Share capital
Ordinary shares are classified as equity. Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue 
of new ordinary shares or options are shown in equity as a deduction, net of tax, from 
the proceeds.

Dividends
Dividend distribution to the Group’s shareholders is recognised as a liability in the 
Group’s financial statements in the period in which the dividends are approved by the 
Group’s shareholders.

Share-based payments
Equity-settled share-based payments to employees and others providing similar services 
are measured at the fair value of the equity instruments at the grant date. The fair value 
determined at the grant date of the equity-settled share-based payments is expensed on a 
straight-line basis over the vesting period, based on the Group’s estimate of equity instruments 
that will eventually vest, with a corresponding increase in equity. Where applicable at the end 
of each reporting period, the Group revises its estimate of the number of equity instruments 
expected to vest. The impact of the revision of the original estimates, if any, is recognised in 
the income statement.

Defined contribution pension obligation
Contributions to defined contribution pension schemes are charged to the income statement 
in the year to which they relate.

For further detail please refer to note 29.

Financial instruments

Defined benefit pension obligation
The Group operates two defined benefit pension schemes in addition to several 
defined contribution schemes, which require contributions to be made to separately 
administered funds.

Defined benefit scheme surpluses and deficits are measured at:
•  the fair value of plan assets at the reporting date; less
•  scheme liabilities calculated using the projected unit credit method discounted to its 

present value using yields available on high-quality corporate bonds that have maturity 
dates approximating to the terms of the liabilities; less

•  the effect of minimum funding requirements agreed with scheme trustees.

A surplus is recognised where the Group has an unconditional right to the economic benefits 
in the form of future contribution reductions or refunds.

Any difference between the interest income on scheme assets and that actually achieved 
on assets, and any changes in the liabilities over the year due to changes in assumptions or 
experience within the scheme, are recognised in other comprehensive income in the period 
in which they arise.

Costs are recognised separately as operating and finance costs in the income statement. 
Operating costs comprise the current service cost, any income or expense on settlements or 
curtailments and past service costs.

Finance items comprise the interest on the net defined benefit asset or liability.

Further information on pensions is disclosed in note 28.

Financial assets
The Group classifies its financial assets into one of the categories discussed below, depending 
on the purpose for which the asset was acquired. The Group has not classified any of its 
financial assets as held to maturity.

Loans and receivables
These assets are non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments that are 
not quoted in an active market. They arise principally from the Group’s trading operations 
(e.g. trade receivables), but also incorporate other types of contractual monetary asset. 
They are initially recognised at fair value plus transaction costs that are directly attributable to 
their acquisition or issue, and are subsequently carried at amortised cost using the effective 
interest rate method, less provision for impairment.

Impairment provisions are recognised when there is objective evidence (such as significant 
financial difficulties on the part of the counter party or default or significant delay in payment) 
that the Group will be unable to collect all of the amounts due under the terms receivable, 
the amount of such a provision being the difference between the net carrying amount and 
the present value of the future expected cash flows associated with the impaired receivable. 
For trade receivables, which are reported net, such provisions are recorded in a separate 
allowance account with the loss being recognised within administrative expenses in the 
consolidated income statement. On confirmation that the trade receivable will not be 
collectable, the gross carrying value of the asset is written off against the associated provision.

The Group’s loans and receivables comprise trade and other receivables and cash and cash 
equivalents in the Group balance sheet.

Financial assets are de-recognised when the rights to receive cash flows from the financial 
assets have expired or where the Group has transferred substantially all risks and rewards 
of ownership.

99

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 27 November 2017 to 25 November 2018

2 Accounting policies continued

Financial liabilities
The Group classifies its financial liabilities into the below category:

1) Other financial liabilities
•  Interest-bearing bank loans and overdrafts – these are recorded initially at fair value, which 
is generally the proceeds received, net of direct issue costs. Subsequently, these liabilities 
are held at amortised cost using the effective interest method. Finance charges, including 
premiums payable on settlement or redemption and direct issue costs are accounted for 
on an accrual basis in the income statement using the effective interest method and are 
added to the carrying amount of the instrument to the extent that they are not settled 
in the period in which they arise. Where existing debt is refinanced with the same lender 
it is treated as an extinguishment of the original debt and a new financial liability if the 
modified terms are substantially different from the previous terms.

•  Trade payables and other short-term monetary liabilities which are initially recognised at fair 

value and subsequently at amortised cost using the effective interest method.

Fair value estimation
The methods and assumptions applied in determining the fair values of financial assets 
and financial liabilities are disclosed in note 27.

3 Critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty
In the application of the Group’s accounting policies, the Directors are required to make 
judgements, estimates and assumptions about the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities 
that are not readily apparent from other sources. The estimates and associated assumptions 
are based on historical experience and other factors that are considered to be relevant. 
Actual results may differ from these estimates.

Critical accounting judgements
Critical judgements, apart from those involving estimations, that are applied in the 
preparation of the consolidated financial statements are discussed below:

Adjusting items
During the year certain items are identified and separately disclosed as adjusting items. 
Judgement is applied as to whether the item meets the necessary criteria as per the 
accounting policy. This assessment covers the nature of the item, cause of occurrence and 
the scale of impact of that item on reported performance. Note 5 provides information on all 
of the items disclosed as adjusting in the current year financial statements.

100  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Sources of estimation uncertainty
Estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Sources of 
estimation and uncertainty are discussed below:

Impairment
Where there are indicators of impairment, management performs an impairment test. 
Recoverable amounts for CGUs are the higher of fair value less costs of disposal, and value 
in use. Value in use is calculated from cash flow projections based on the Group’s three-
year internal forecasts. The forecasts are extrapolated to perpetuity with nil growth rate. 
Key estimates and sensitivities for impairment of assets are disclosed in notes 12 and 13.

Supplier income
Supplier income is recognised as a credit within cost of sales. For some sources of supplier 
income, management is required to make estimates in determining the amount and timing of 
recognition of income. These estimates are based on documented evidence of agreements 
with suppliers.

In determining the amount of volume-related allowances recognised in any period, 
management estimate whether the Group will meet contractual target volumes, based on 
historical and forecast performance. 

For promotional funding relating to investment in the customer offer by a supplier, there is 
limited estimation required as funding is pre-agreed and collected throughout the year 
shortly after promotions have ended.

Outcomes within the next financial year that are different from management’s assumptions 
could require a material adjustment to the carrying amount of the affected asset.

Pensions
The liabilities of the defined benefit pension schemes operated by the Group are determined 
using methods relying on the actuarial estimates and assumptions, including rates of increase 
in pensionable salaries and pensions, net defined benefit asset or liability, life expectancies 
and discount rates. Details of the key assumption are set out in note 28. The Group takes 
advice from independent actuaries relating to the appropriateness of the assumptions and 
the recognition of any surplus. Changes in the assumptions used may have a significant 
effect on the Group statement of comprehensive invoice and the Group statement of 
financial position.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

5 Adjusting items
Due to their significance or one-off nature, certain items have been classified as adjusting 
as follows:

2018  
£’000

2017  
£’000

4 Revenue and other income
In accordance with IFRS 8 ‘Operating segments’ an operating segment is defined as a 
business activity whose operating results are reviewed by the chief operating decision-maker 
and for which discrete information is available. The chief operating decision-maker, who is 
responsible for allocating resources and assessing performance of the operating segments, 
has been identified as the Board of Directors. The principal activities of the Group are currently 
managed as one segment. Consequently all activities relate to this segment, being the 
operation of convenience and newsagent stores in the UK.

Cost of sales
Supplier administrationa
Supply chain transitionb

The analysis of the Group’s revenue for the period from continuing operations is as follows:

Gross loss

Revenue
Sale of goods

Other operating income1
Property rental income
Other rental income1

Finance income
Finance income

2018  
£’000

2017  
£’000
restated1

1,241,539

1,148,747

3,249
3,562

6,811

–

3,224
4,563

7,787

93

1,248,350

1,156,627

Administrative expenses
Fines (Health and Safety and Minimum Wage Compliance)c
Supplier administrationa
Supply chain transitionb
Defined benefit pension scheme – past service costd
Unprofitable store closure programmef
Co-op acquisition and integration costsh

(Profits)/losses arising on property-related items
Sale and leasebacke
Unprofitable store closure programmef
Impairmentg

1  During the year management performed a review of all revenue streams. As a result of the review all income from Post Office 

will now be classified as revenue. The reclassification of £16.7m from other income to revenue is the net income received as an 
agent in the transaction with the Post Office. This has increased gross profit by 1% from 25% to 26%. The prior year’s revenue has 
also been restated on the same basis and the value of this restatement is £16.9m.

Finance costs
Co-op acquisition and integration costsh
Unprofitable store closure programmef

Tax effect on adjusting items

807
621

1,428

1,236
935
4,306
641
–
–

7,118

(11,941)
2,535
3,297

(6,109)

–
158

158

(1,762)

833

–
–

–

–
–
–
–
283
3,447

3,730

–
2,621
–

2,621

1,521
–

1,521

(1,014)

6,858

a.  Supplier administration 

The administration of P&H, our primary supplier to c.700 newsagents and small convenience stores, on 28 November 2017 
created stock availability issues in store. To address this stock availability and to minimise disruption we entered into a short-
term contract with Nisa, a short-term contract with Fresh to Store, brought forward the commencement of the Morrisons 
contract, and introduced a new supply chain solution for tobacco, via Clipper Logistics. As such, the Group incurred 
additional one-off costs, which are not reflective of ongoing costs and therefore management have classified these as 
adjusting items. Resulting in a net cash outflow of £1.7m.

101

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 27 November 2017 to 25 November 2018

5 Adjusting items continued
b.   Supply chain transition 

As a result of the integration of a new supply partner, Morrisons, material one-off costs of transitioning were incurred. 
These costs included £1.3m of additional payroll cost, £1.8m of marketing, £1.5m of store preparation, including costs 
associated with stock replacement and £0.3m of other costs. In line with the accounting policy for adjusting items, the 
additional costs incurred as a result of the transition are classified as adjusting items. Resulting in a net cash outflow of £4.9m.

c.   Fines (Health and Safety and Minimum Wage Compliance)  

On 22 December 2017 the Group was found guilty of a health and safety breach relating to contractor works at a store and 
subsequently a fine of £612k was issued to the Group. This was disclosed as a contingent liability in the Annual Report 2017. 
Following the completion of a HMRC National Minimum Wage investigation the Group was fined £227k and paid arrears due 
to colleagues of £397k. Each of these fines are fully paid. Management classify these fines as adjusting items due to the non-
recurring nature. Resulting in a net cash outflow of £612k.

d.   Past service cost 

Management have classified the amount for Guaranteed Minimum Pension (GMP) equalisation as an adjusting item due to its 
non-recurring nature. In October 2018, the High Court ruled that Lloyds Banking Group will need to equalise pension benefits 
for the effect of unequal GMP between men and women, which dates back to 1990. The impact of the GMP calculation on 
our pensions was prepared following the C2 model. There was no cash impact from this adjustment.

e.   Sale and leaseback 

During the year the Group undertook a number of sale and leaseback transactions on its freehold property. In line with the 
accounting policy for adjusting items management concluded that the profits for sale and leasebacks of property were 
significantly higher than prior years (2017: £3m) and therefore not in line with ordinary business and should therefore be treated 
as adjusting. Resulting in a net cash inflow of £26.7m.

f.   Unprofitable store closure programme 

Management have undertaken an ongoing review of poor performing stores and have made the decision to close a material 
number of stores which are not economically viable to continue trading. The majority of these stores are either near lease 
expiry or lease break date. The closure programme consists of stores which have either closed in 2018 or will close in 2019. 
Management have adjusted onerous lease provisions, impairment, and other costs in relation to the closures. Provisions are 
discounted to their present value at the reporting date, giving rise to a finance cost as the discount is unwound. Any other 
closures costs which cannot be reliably estimated at present, may also be adjusting in 2019. Management have classified 
these as adjusting due to the scale of the closure programme. Resulting in a net cash outflow of £861k.

g.   Impairment 

Management have assessed the value in use cash flow of each branch against the carrying value of its assets, as a result 
of the impairment review an impairment charge was recognised in the year. Further information can be found in note 12. 
There was no cash impact from this adjustment.

h.   Co-op acquisition and integration costs 

On 13 July 2016 management entered into an agreement to purchase 298 convenience stores from the Co-op, for an 
aggregate consideration of £117m. The acquisition was approved by the Competition and Markets Authority on 20 December 
2016. The acquisition was integrated during 2017 by Martin McColl Limited, a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Group. 
The adjusting costs relate to legal fees, sponsor fees, implementation costs and finance costs. All 298 stores were successfully 
transitioned by 13 July 2017. There was no cash impact from this adjustment in the current year.

102  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

6 Operating profit

Arrived at after charging/(crediting)

Depreciation and amortisation expense
Write-down of inventory recognised as an expense
Operating lease expense – property
Profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment
Impairment
Cost of inventories recognised as an expense

The analysis of the Auditors’ remuneration is as follows:

Audit fees
Audit of Group
Other services
Audit related assurance services (including interim review)
Other non-audit services not covered above

Note

12

2018  
£’000

17,054
16,471
35,868
(12,150)
3,297
951,073

2017  
£’000

15,636
13,766
33,810
(489)
746
876,599

2018  
£’000

2017  
£’000

283

43
–

43

326

242

41
14

55

297

Included within the audit fee total for the year is an amount of £51,000 that is deemed to be non-
recurring in nature.

Adjusted EBITDA and operating profit excluding property-related items
In order to provide shareholders with a measure of the underlying performance of the 
business which is more aligned with the way that management monitor and manage the 
business, the Group makes adjustments to profit before tax. Adjusting items relate to costs 
or incomes that derive from events or transactions that fall within the normal activities of the 
Group, but which are excluded from the Group’s adjusted profit before tax measure due 
to their size and nature in order to better reflect management’s view of the performance 
of the Group. The adjusted profit before tax measure (profit before adjusting items) is not a 
recognised profit measure under IFRS and may not be directly comparable with adjusted 
profit measures used by other companies. Details of adjusting items are set out in note 5.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

2018  
£’000

2017  
£’000

8 Finance income and costs

Adjusted EBITDA excluding property-related items
Operating profit before adjusting items
Depreciation and amortisation
Profits arising on property-related items
Share-based payments

Adjusted operating profit excluding 
property-related items
Operating profit before adjusting items
Less: Profits arising on property-related items

7 Employee costs
The aggregate payroll costs were as follows:

Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Pension costs, defined benefit scheme

18,321
17,054
(416)
–

34,959

18,321
(416)

17,905

2018  
£’000

171,993
17,142
1,589

190,724

31,385
15,289
(3,110)
436

44,000

31,385
(3,110)

28,275

2017  
£’000

157,111
15,268
1,549

173,928

The average number of persons employed by the Group (including Directors) during the 
period, analysed by category was as follows:

Retailing
Central administration

2018 
No.

20,507
507

21,014

2017 
No.

20,749
512

21,261

Finance income
Interest income on bank deposits

Finance costs
Interest on bank overdrafts and borrowings
Interest on obligations under finance leases 
and hire purchase contracts
Amortisation of issue costs
Other finance costs
Finance costs in relation to Co-op stores acquisition 
and integration (included in adjusting items)

Total finance costs

Net finance costs

9 Income tax

Income statement
Current tax:

Current tax on profit for the period
Adjustments in respect of prior periods

Deferred tax:

Origination and reversal of temporary differences
Arising from change in tax rate
Adjustments in respect of prior periods

Income tax expense for the period

Equity items
Share-based payment
Fixed assets

Other comprehensive income

Deferred tax in respect of actuarial valuation 
of retirement benefits

2018  
£’000

2017  
£’000

–

93

(7,289)

(4,522)

(148)
(415)
(165)

–

(8,017)

(8,017)

(274)
(381)
(23)

(1,521)

(6,721)

(6,628)

2018  
£’000

2017  
£’000

2,858
(7)

2,851

(2,123)
234
54 

(1,835)

1,016

92
35

127

150

4,780
(173)

4,607

(81)
(14)
(298)

(393)

4,214

–
–

517

103

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 27 November 2017 to 25 November 2018

9 Income tax continued
The differences are reconciled below:

Profit before tax

Tax on profit calculated at standard rate for 2018 of 19.00% 
(2017: 19.33%)
Income not taxable
Expenses not deductible
Deferred tax on share options
Adjustments in respect of prior years
Arising from change in rate of tax
Exempt amounts1
Disposal of business combination assets

Total tax charge

2018  
£’000

7,867

1,495
–
817
55
47 
234
605
(2,237)

1,016

2017  
£’000

18,406

3,558
(8)
650
(18)
(471)
(14)
517
–

4,214

1 

Include finance leases, land and buildings in use and disposal rebates against assets.

Changes to the UK corporation tax rates were enacted as part of Finance Bill 2016 on 
6 September 2016. This included reductions to the main rate to reduce the rate to 17% from 
1 April 2020.

The tax charge for the 52 week period was £1,016,000 (2017: £4,214,000) representing a rate 
of 12.9% (2017: 22.9%). The comparable effective rate of tax in 2018 excluding the impact 
of non-deductible adjusting items was 26.6% (2017: 19.9%). The difference between the 
current and statutory rate of 19.0% in the period is due principally to the sale and leaseback 
and closure cost transactions, all of which are classified as adjusting items, see note 5 for 
further information.

Amounts recognised in other comprehensive income

2018

Tax 
(expense) 
/benefit 
£’000

Before tax 
£’000

Net of tax 
£’000

Before tax 
£’000

2017

Tax 
(expense) 
/benefit 
£’000

Net of tax 
£’000

859

(150)

709

3,039

(517)

2,522

Remeasurements 
of post employment 
benefit obligations

10 Dividends

Interim 2018 dividend of 3.40p (2017: 3.40p) per ordinary share
Final 2017 dividend of 6.90p (2016: 6.80p) per ordinary share

2018  
£’000

3,916
7,947

11,863

2017  
£’000

3,916
7,832

11,748

The Directors are proposing a final 2018 dividend of 0.6 pence (2017: 6.90 pence) per share 
totalling £691,000 (2017: £7,947,000).

The proposed final dividend is subject to approval by shareholders passing a written resolution 
and accordingly has not been included as a liability in these financial statements.

104  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

11 Earnings per share
Basic and diluted earnings per share are calculated by dividing the profit for the period 
attributable to shareholders by the weighted average number of shares.

12 Property, plant and equipment

Basic weighted average number of shares

Diluted weighted average number of shares

Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders (£’000)

Basic earnings per share

Diluted earnings per share

Adjusted earnings per share:
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders (£’000)
Adjusting items (note 5)
Tax effect of adjustments

Profit after tax and before adjusting items

Basic adjusted earnings per share 

Diluted adjusted earnings per share 

2018  
£’000

 2017  
£’000

115,173,145

115,172,774

115,331,969

115,724,645

6,851

5.95p

5.94p

6,851
2,595
(1,762)

7,684

6.67p

6.66p

14,192

12.32p

12.26p

14,192
7,872
(1,014)

21,050

18.28p

18.19p

The difference between the basic and diluted average number of shares represents the 
dilutive effect of share options in existence.

The diluted weighted average number of ordinary shares is calculated using the following:

Ordinary shares in issue at the start of the period
Effect of shares issued for the Co-op acquisition (full year)
Effects of shares issued during the period

115,172,774
–
741

Total shares in issue at the end of the year
Effect of shares to be issued for the long-term incentive plan (LTIP)

115,173,515
158,825
Weighted average number of ordinary shares at the end of the period 115,332,340

108,505,494
6,667,280
–

115,172,774
551,871

115,724,645

 2018  
£’000

 2017  
£’000

Cost or valuation
At 28 November 2016
Additions
Acquired through business combinations
Classified as held for sale
Disposals

At 26 November 2017

At 27 November 2017
Additions
Acquired through business combinations
Disposals
Transfers to software

At 25 November 2018

Depreciation
At 28 November 2016
Charge for period
Disposals
Impairment
Classified as held for sale

At 26 November 2017

At 27 November 2017
Charge for the period
Disposals
Impairment
Transfers to software

At 25 November 2018

Carrying amount
At 25 November 2018
At 26 November 2017

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Land and 
buildings  
£’000

Furniture,  
fittings and 
equipment 
£’000

Total  
£’000

125,085
24,708
34,249
3,044
(8,932)

178,154

178,154
19,817
2,040
(14,044)
(1,133)

90,406
15,981
4,410
3,044
(3,690)

110,151

110,151
13,968
1,314
1,429
–

126,862

184,834

45,186
10,761
(1,525)
746
2,344

57,512

57,512
11,678
(1,279)
3,297
–

58,302
14,996
(1,799)
746
2,344

74,589

74,589
16,356
(1,628)
3,297
(94)

34,679
8,727
29,839
–
(5,242)

68,003

68,003
5,849
726
(15,473)
(1,133)

57,972

13,116
4,235
(274)
–
–

17,077

17,077
4,678
(349)
–
(94)

21,312

71,208

92,520

36,660
50,926

55,654
52,639

92,314
103,565

105

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 27 November 2017 to 25 November 2018

12 Property, plant and equipment continued
During the year the Group disposed of property in sale and leaseback transactions, the net 
book value of these properties at disposal was £13,855,000.

13 Intangible assets

Included within fixture and fittings is £2,755,000 of finance lease assets.

For impairment testing the Group classes each branch as a CGU (cash generating unit). 
Each CGU was tested for impairment at the period end date. Management recognise an 
impairment where the recoverable amount of the CGU does not exceed its carrying value at 
the balance sheet date. Recoverable amounts for CGUs are the higher of fair value less costs 
of disposal, and value in use.

The key assumptions for the value in use calculation include the discount rate, long-term 
growth rates and forecast cash flows. The value in use calculations use forecast cash flows 
taking into account actual performance for the year and the Group’s cash flow forecast for 
a three-year period, which has been approved by management. Cash flows beyond this 
period are extrapolated using a long-term growth rate of nil and discounted with a weighted 
average cost of capital (WACC) of 11.75% (2017: 8.9%). The change in WACC is driven by a 
decrease in share price and reduction in borrowings.

The discount rate is based on the Group’s weighted average cost of capital, taking into 
account the cost of capital and borrowings, to which specific market-related premium 
adjustments are made.

Management extrapolated the cash flows to perpetuity with a growth rate of nil as this 
was considered to be a prudent basis. In assessing the EBITDA sensitivities, we have also 
considered the potential downside from Brexit and related mitigation, the impact of which 
would not affect the carrying values. Further detail of our considerations and sensitivities are 
included within going concern assessment in our accounting policies.

The annual impairment testing resulted in an impairment charge of £3,297,000 against 
branch assets.

106  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Cost or valuation
At 28 November 2016
Additions
Fair value adjustment for goodwill
Deferred tax on fair value adjustment of land and buildings

At 26 November 2017

At 27 November 2017
Additions
Transfers from PPE

At 25 November 2018

Amortisation
At 28 November 2016
Amortisation charge

At 26 November 2017

At 27 November 2017
Amortisation charge
Transfers from PPE

At 25 November 2018

Carrying amount
At 25 November 2018
At 26 November 2017 

Goodwill 
£’000

157,292
91,442
(560)
3,377

251,551

251,551
2,029
–

Other 
intangible 
assets  
£’000

5,872
929
–
–

6,801

6,801
1,478
1,133

Total  
£’000

163,164
92,371
(560)
3,377

258,352

258,352
3,507
1,133

253,580

9,412

262,992

4,234
–

4,234

4,234
–
–

4,579
640

5,219

5,219
698
94

8,813
640

9,453

9,453
698
94

4,234

6,011

10,245

249,346
247,317

3,401
1,582

252,747
248,899

Software includes £1,391,000 of internally generated development costs.

Transfers in the year relate to the reallocation of IT development costs, previously classified 
within tangible assets.

Amortisation expenses of £698,000 (2017: £640,000) are included in administrative expenses.

Goodwill acquired in a business combination is not amortised, but is reviewed for impairment 
on an annual basis, or more frequently if there are indications that goodwill may be impaired.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Growth rate
Management have assumed a long term growth rate to perpetuity after three years of nil, 
which is considered a prudent basis. The growth rate in the next three years is based on 
managements expectation of sales growth.

Budgeted cash flows
Management have conducted sensitivity analysis on the CGUs VIU by reducing the 
anticipated future cash flows. A reduction of 2.2% in forecast cash flows would reduce the 
headroom to nil.

14 Investments

Investments at cost

2018  
£’000

36

2017  
£’000

36

The investments relate to shares held in an entity outside the Group.

Management recognise an impairment where the recoverable amount of the CGU does 
not exceed the carrying value of goodwill. For the purpose of goodwill, in line with the 
accounting policy, the business manages and makes decisions as one group of CGUs and 
therefore impairment is assessed on that single group. The recoverable amount of the CGU 
is determined from value in use calculations with a discounted cash flow model used to 
calculate this amount. Management has determined the values assigned to each of the 
key assumptions.

The key assumptions for the value in use calculation include the discount rate, long-term 
growth rates and forecast cash flows. The value in use calculations use forecast cash flows 
taking into account actual performance for the year and the Group’s cash flow forecast for 
a three-year period, which has been approved by management. Cash flows beyond this 
period are extrapolated using a long-term growth rate of nil and discounted with a weighted 
average cost of capital (WACC) of 11.75% (2017: 8.9%). The change in WACC is driven by a 
decrease in share price and reduction in borrowings. 

The discount rate is based on the Group’s weighted average cost of capital, taking into 
account the cost of capital and borrowings, to which specific market-related premium 
adjustments are made.

Management extrapolated the cash flows to perpetuity with a growth rate of nil as this 
was considered to be a prudent basis. In assessing the EBITDA sensitivities, we have also 
considered the potential downside from Brexit and related mitigation, the impact of which 
would not affect the carrying value. Further detail of our considerations and sensitivities are 
included within going concern assessment in our accounting policies.

Upon review of impairment, management have calculated the recoverable amount and it 
exceeds the carrying amount and therefore have not included an impairment charge.

Significant estimates

Change in discount rate
The Group has conducted sensitivity analysis on the impairment testing for goodwill. 
With reasonable possible changes in key assumptions including a 2 percentage point change 
in WACC, management have concluded that the carrying amount of goodwill would be 
likely to exceed the value in use.

107

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 27 November 2017 to 25 November 2018

14 Investments continued
Group subsidiaries
Details of the Group subsidiaries as at 25 November 2018 are as follows:

All are held by the Company unless stated. All subsidiaries are registered at the same address as McColl’s Retail Group plc, except for those registered in Scotland, whose registered address 
is Unit 11, The Avenue, Newton Mearns, Glasgow, G77 6AA.

Name of subsidiary

A Harris Limited*
Birrell Limited*
Bracklands Limited*
Charnwait Management Limited*
Clark Retail Limited*
Dillons Stores Limited*
Forbouys Limited*
Key Food Stores Limited*
Lavells Limited*
Lewis Meeson Limited*
Marshell Group Limited*
Martin McColl Limited*
Martin McColl Retail Limited*
Martin Retail Group Limited*
Martin the Newsagent Limited*
NSS Newsagents Limited*
NSS Newsagents Retail Limited*
Price Smashers Limited*
RS McColl (UK) Limited*
Smile Holdings Limited*
Smile Property Limited*
Smile Stores Limited*
Thistledove Limited*
TM Group Limited*
TM Group Holdings Limited*
TM Pension Trustees Limited*
TM Vending Limited*
Tog Limited*
Trents Leisure Limited*

* 

Indicates direct investment of the company.

Principal activity

Dormant
Dormant
Property Company
Retailing
Retailing
Retailing
Dormant
Intermediate Holding Co
Dormant
Dormant
Corporate activities
Retailing
Intermediate Holding Co
Retailing
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Intermediate Holding Co
Dormant
Intermediate Holding Co
Dormant
Retailing
Intermediate Holding Co
Dormant
Predecessor Holding Co
Dormant
Corporate Activities
Intermediate Holding Co
Dormant

Registered office

Scotland
Scotland
Scotland
England and Wales
Scotland
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
Scotland
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales

Proportion of ownership interest 
and voting rights held 2018

Proportion of ownership interest 
and voting rights held 2017

100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%

100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%

From the above table the following subsidiaries will take advantage of the audit exemption set out within section 479A of the Companies Act 2006 for the year ended 25 November 2018: 
Bracklands Limited, Charnwait Management Limited, Clark Retail Limited, Dillons Stores Limited, Martin McColl Limited, Martin McColl Retail Group Limited, Martin Retail Group Limited, 
Smile Stores Limited, Thistledove Limited, TM Group Holdings Limited, TM Vending Limited. All the subsidiaries are included in the Group consolidated financial statements for the period.

The parent company will guarantee the debts and liabilities of these UK subsidiaries at the balance sheet date in accordance with section 479C of the Companies Act 2006.

108  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

15 Business combinations
During the period, the Group made 11 trade and asset acquisitions, none of which were 
individually considered material to the Group. An immaterial contingent liability is recognised 
in respect of off profile stock and store dilapidations. The trade goodwill acquired represents 
the established reputation of the business and is not expected to be deductible for tax 
purposes. The cash consideration for these acquisitions and the assets acquired are 
summarised as follows:

Tangible fixed assets
Inventory
Goodwill

Cash consideration

16 Inventories

Finished goods and goods for resale
Classified as held for sale

17 Trade and other receivables

Trade receivables
Supplier rebates
Prepayments
Other receivables
Transferred to assets held for sale

Total current trade and other receivables

Ageing of past due trade receivables

31 to 60 days
61 to 90 days
Greater than 90 days

2018 
£’000

2,040
444
2,029

4,513

2017 
£’000

76,265
(300)

75,965

2017 
£’000

1,945
24,746
6,972
6,238
(91)

39,810

2017 
£’000

318
509
376

1,203

2018 
£’000

77,146
–

77,146

2018 
£’000

3,269
25,002
8,384
5,329
–

41,984

2018 
£’000

262
103
360

725

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Ageing of past due supplier rebates receivables

31 to 60 days
61 to 90 days
Greater than 90 days

18 Cash and cash equivalents

Cash at bank and in hand

19 Trade and other payables

Current
Trade payables
Accrued expenses
Holiday pay accrual
Social security and other taxes
Other payables
Accrued interest
Deferred income
Classified as assets held for sale

Non-current
Deferred income

2018 
£’000

482
97
535

1,114

2017 
£’000

1,299
818
621

2,738

2018 
£’000

28,547

2017 
£’000

14,273

2018 
£’000

2017 
£’000

164,110
30,814
1,272
9,868
2,107
335
4,831
–

213,337

9,552

9,552

119,400
27,432
1,281
9,321
1,925
394
4,385
(468)

163,670

10,367

10,367

Trade payables and accruals principally comprise amounts outstanding for trade purchases 
and ongoing costs. For most suppliers no interest is charged on the trade payables, but for 
certain suppliers we have agreement to extend payment terms for which interest is charged. 
The Group has financial risk management policies in place to ensure that all payables are 
paid within the pre-agreed credit terms.

The Directors consider that the carrying amount of trade payables approximates to their 
fair value.

109

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 27 November 2017 to 25 November 2018

20 Loans and borrowings

21 Net debt

Current
Finance lease liabilities

Non-current
Bank borrowings
Unamortised issue costs
Finance lease liabilities

2018 
£’000

2,148

2,148

125,500
(1,458)
947

124,989

2017 
£’000

1,799

1,799

154,500
(1,532)
1,754

154,722

The long-term loans are secured by a fixed charge over the Group’s head office property 
together with a floating charge over the Group’s assets.

In November 2018, the Group amended some of the terms of the existing facility. The Group 
has an amortising £87,500,000 term loan and a £100,000,000 revolving facility with a 
£50,000,000 accordion. The current facility drawn as at 25 November 2018 is £125,500,000 
(2017: £154,500,000).

Details of loans and hire purchase obligations repayable within two to five years are as follows:

Term loan and revolving facility available until July 2021
Finance lease liabilities

2018 
£’000

125,500
947

126,447

2017 
£’000

154,500
1,754

156,254

110  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Cash at bank and in hand

Term loan and revolving facility available until July 2021
Less: unamortised issue costs

Amounts due under finance lease obligations

Note

18

2018 
£’000

28,547

28,547

(125,500)
1,458

(124,042)

(3,095)

(98,590)

Net debt

Analysis of net debt

Cash and short-term deposits

Bank borrowings
Finance lease liabilities

2017 
£’000

14,273

14,273
(152,968)
(3,552)

(156,520)

(142,247)

Cash flow 
£’000

Other non-cash 
movements 
£’000

14,274

14,274
29,000
457

29,457

43,731

–

–
(74)
–

(74)

(74)

2017 
£’000

14,273

14,273

(154,500)
1,532

(152,968)

(3,552)

(142,247)

2018 
£’000

28,547

28,547
(124,042)
(3,095)

(127,137)

(98,590)

22 Leases and commitments

Group operating leases
The Group leases various properties under non-cancellable operating leases. The terms of the 
property leases vary, with rent reviews every three to five years and many have break clauses.

The total future value of minimum lease payments is as follows:

Land and buildings
Within one year
In two to five years
In over five years

2018 
£’000

2017 
£’000

32,096
99,971
119,655

251,722

32,185
100,441
117,885

250,511

As set out in note 4 property rental income earned during the year was £3,249,000 
(2017: £3,224,000). All operating lease contracts contain market review clauses in the event 
that the lessee exercises its option to renew. The lessee does not have an option to purchase 
the property at the expiry of the lease period.

At the balance sheet date, the Group had contracted with tenants for the following future 
minimum lease payments:

Within one year
Within one to five years
After five years

2018 
£’000

283
549
382

1,214

Finance leases
The Group acquires the majority of its motor vehicles and LED lighting under contract 
purchase agreements and such assets are generally classified as finance leases.

Future lease payments are due as follows:

Amounts due within one year
Amounts due within one to five years

Less future interest

2018 
£’000

2,349
1,073

3,422
(327)

3,095

2017 
£’000

273
427
261

961

2017 
£’000

1,882
1,840

3,722
(170)

3,552

Other financial commitments
In order to manage its exposure to fluctuating energy prices, during the year the Group 
entered into contracts to purchase 64.4 MW of electricity at a fixed price from SSE. 
The contracts allow for a 10% over or underutilisation of the power contracted at the 
rates secured. While management acknowledge that the forward contracts in place are 
derivatives, they cannot be traded and are therefore treated as contracts that secure a 
pre-agreed price for electricity requirements to operate the store portfolio. These are not on 
the balance sheet and are used to give certainty over a key cost line to the business.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

23 Provisions

At 27 November 2017 (including held 
for sale)
Additional provisions
Utilised during the period
Unwinding of the discount included 
in provisions

At 25 November 2018

Non-current liabilities

Current liabilities

Dilapidations 
£’000

Onerous 
contracts 
£’000

3,870
871
(681)

14

4,074

–

4,074

1,231
1,138
(931)

157

1,595

1,042

553

Total 
£’000

5,101
2,009
(1,612)

171

5,669

1,042

4,627

Dilapidations
The provision includes estimates for certain properties for which the extent of the dilapidation 
has not been established. It is expected that most of these costs will be incurred in the next 
five years.

Onerous contracts
A provision is recognised for the present value of the unavoidable costs of the lease net of 
expected benefits for all leases that have been identified as onerous. The onerous lease 
provisions are recognised for a period of up to two years.

111

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 27 November 2017 to 25 November 2018

24 Deferred tax
Deferred tax assets and liabilities

2018
Pension benefit obligations
Revaluation of property, plant and equipment
Revaluation of intangible assets
Other items including share options and temporary 
differences 

2017

Pension benefit obligations
Revaluation of property, plant and equipment
Revaluation of intangible assets
Other items

Deferred tax movement during the period

Asset 
£’000
–
–
–

97

97

Asset 
£’000

–
–
–
172

172

Liability 
£’000
(2,018)
(957)
(3,920)

–

(6,895)

Liability 
£’000

(1,744)
(3,174)
(3,610)
–

(8,528)

Net deferred 
tax 
£’000
(2,018)
(957)
(3,920)

97

(6,798)

Net deferred 
tax 
£’000

(1,744)
(3,174)
(3,610)
172

(8,356)

At 
27 November 
2017 
£’000

Recognised in 
income 
£’000

Recognised 
in other 
comprehensive 
income 
£’000

Recognised in 
equity 
£’000

At 
25 November 
2018 
£’000

Pension benefit 
obligations
Revaluation of property, 
plant and equipment
Revaluation of 
intangible assets
Other items including 
share options and 
temporary differences

Net tax assets/(liabilities)

(1,744)

(124)

(150)

(3,174)

2,182

(3,610)

(310)

172

(8,356)

(76)

1,672

–

–

–

(150)

–

35

–

–

35

(2,018)

(957)

(3,920)

96

(6,799)

112  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Deferred tax movement during the prior period:

At 
28 November 
2016 
£’000

Recognised in 
income 
£’000

Recognised 
in other 
comprehensive 
income 
£’000

Recognised in 
equity 
£’000

At 
26 November 
2017 
£’000

Pension benefit 
obligations
Revaluation of property, 
plant and equipment
Revaluation of intangible 
assets
Other items

(1,020)

(422)

(3,414)

Net tax assets/(liabilities)

(4,856)

(207)

733

(196)
101

431

(517)

–

(1,744)

(3,485)

(3,174)

–
71

(3,610)
172

(8,356)

(517)

(3,414)

–

–
–

Deferred tax has arisen owing to accelerated capital allowances, business combinations, 
pension deficit/surplus and other temporary differences and also in respect of the taxable 
gains arising on the disposal of intangible fixed assets where the gains have been rolled into 
replacement assets.

Deferred tax at 25 November 2018 has been measured at 17% (2017: 17%) being the tax rate 
enacted at the balance sheet date expected to be effective for future periods.

25 Authorised, issued and fully paid share capital

At 28 November 2017
Shares issued during the period

At 25 November 2018

Number of ordinary 
shares 0.1 pence each

Share capital 
£’000

Share premium 
£’000

115,172,774
741

115,173,515

115
–

115

12,579
1

12,580

The Board has authorised the allotment of shares equal to the nominal value of £77,000.

The Company has one class of ordinary shares which carry no right to fixed income. All issued 
shares are fully paid.

The Group did not acquire any of its own shares for cancellation in the 52 weeks ending 
25 November 2018 or 52 weeks ending 26 November 2017.

The shares rank equally for voting purposes. On a show of hands each shareholder has one 
vote and on a poll each shareholder has one vote per ordinary share held. Each ordinary 
share ranks equally for any dividend declared. Each ordinary share ranks equally for any 
distributions made on a winding up of the Group. Each ordinary share ranks equally in the 
right to receive a relative proportion of shares in the event of a capitalisation of reserves.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

26 Contingent liabilities
There are a number of contingent liabilities that arise in the normal course of business, which 
if realised, are not expected to result in a material liability to the Group. The Group recognises 
provisions for liabilities when it is more likely than not that a settlement will be required and the 
value of such a payment can be reliably estimated.

At 25 November 2018, the Group has no material contingent liabilities. (2017: £600k).

27 Financial instruments and risk management

Interest rate risk
The Group is exposed to interest rate risk from its use of interest-bearing financial instruments. 
This is a market risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate 
because of changes in interest rates. There are no financial instruments held at level 1, 2 or 3 
fair value.

Floating rate financial liabilities on which interest is paid bear interest at rates based on 
1 month LIBOR. It is the Group’s policy to consider the need for interest rate hedging on an 
ongoing basis. No interest rate hedging is currently in place although this is kept under review 
by management.

Interest rate risk profile of financial liabilities and assets
The interest rate profile of the financial liabilities of the Group is as follows:

Fixed rate financial liabilities
Floating rate financial liabilities
Financial liabilities on which no interest is paid

Financial liabilities

2018 
£’000

3,095
125,500
218,055

346,650

2017 
£’000

1,836
156,216
165,185

323,237

The floating rate financial liabilities comprise a sterling designated working capital facility 
and hire purchase borrowings. The interest rate profile of the financial assets of the Group is 
as follows:

Financial assets on which no interest is paid

2018 
£’000

70,531

2017 
£’000

54,692

If interest rates had been 0.5% higher during the period ended 25 November 2018, with 
all other variables held constant, the post-tax profit for the period would have been 
approximately £475,000 lower (2017: £339,000 lower) as a result of higher interest expense.

Liquidity risk
Liquidity risk arises from the Group’s management of working capital and the finance charges 
on its debt instruments and repayments of principal. It is the risk that the Group will encounter 
difficulty in meeting its financial obligations as they fall due. Management carries out daily 
cash forecasts covering the next three to four periods. In addition management consider 
liquidity as part of the annual budgeting and long-term planning process.

The Group’s objective is to maintain a balance between continuity of funding and flexibility 
through the use of overdrafts and credit facilities to ensure that it will always have sufficient 
cash to allow it to meet its liabilities when they become due.

Maturity of financial liabilities
The maturity profile of the Group’s financial liabilities based on the remaining period at the 
balance sheet date to the contractual maturity date, was as follows:

Up to 3 months or on demand
In 3–12 months
In more than one year but not more than two years
In more than two years but not more than five years
In more than five years

2018 
£’000

211,584
8,940
20,611
105,515
–

346,650

2017 
£’000

155,268
1,349
3,561
162,778
282

323,238

The disclosures above are the contractual undiscounted cash flows and exclude unamortised 
finance costs.

Borrowing facilities
The Group had certain borrowing facilities available to it for general working capital 
requirements, of which £38,000,000 has been drawn at 25 November 2018 (2017: £57,000,000).

Credit risk
Given the nature of the Group’s operations, credit risk is not considered significant and arises 
mainly from cash deposits held with banks and financial institutions which have a good credit 
rating. Credit risk also arises from trade and other receivables which comprise amounts due 
from credit card institutions and rebates due from suppliers.

113

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 27 November 2017 to 25 November 2018

27 Financial instruments and risk management continued
Set out below is a comparison by category of carrying values and fair values of all the Group’s 
financial assets and financial liabilities:

26 November 2018

27 November 2017

Carrying value 
£’000

Fair value 
£’000

Carrying value 
£’000

Fair value 
£’000

28 Retirement benefit schemes
The Group accounts for pensions in accordance with IAS 19.

The Group operates two final salary defined benefit pension schemes in the UK, the TM Group 
Pension Scheme and the TM Pension Plan, in addition to several defined contribution schemes 
which require contributions to be made to separately administered funds. Pension costs for 
defined contribution schemes were £1,649,000 (2017: £1,559,000).

Financial liabilities
Trade and other short-term payables
Hire purchase borrowings
Long-term borrowings
Long-term payables

Financial assets
Other investments carried at cost
Classified as loans and receivables
Short-term receivables
Cash and short-term deposits

(208,503)
(3,095)
(125,500)
(9,552)

(208,503)
(3,095)
(125,500)
(9,552)

(346,650)

(346,650)

(154,818)
(3,552)
(154,500)
(10,368)

(323,238)

(154,818)
(3,552)
(154,500)
(10,368)

(323,238)

The two defined benefit pension schemes are subject to the UK regulatory framework for 
pensions, including the Scheme Specific Funding requirements. The schemes are operated 
under trust and, as such, the trustees of the schemes are responsible for operating the 
schemes and they have a statutory responsibility to act in accordance with the Trust 
Deed and Rules, in the best interest of the beneficiaries of the schemes, and UK legislation 
(including Trust Law).

36

36

36

36

41,948
28,547

70,531

41,948
28,547

70,531

40,393
14,273

54,702

40,393
14,273

54,702

The long-term rating for all financial institution counter parties ranges from AAA to Baa1 per 
Moody’s rating scale.

Capital disclosures
The Group’s objectives when maintaining capital are to safeguard the entity’s ability 
to continue as a going concern and to provide an adequate return to shareholders. 
Capital comprises the Group’s equity i.e. share capital including share premium and retained 
earnings, excluding pension asset and liability.

The Group’s net debt to capital ratio is as follows:

The nature of the schemes exposes the Group to the risk of paying unanticipated additional 
contributions to the schemes in times of adverse experience. The most financially significant 
risks are likely to be:

•  members living for longer than expected;
•  higher than expected actual inflation;
•  lower than expected investment returns; and
•  the risk that movements in the value of the schemes’ liabilities are not met by corresponding 

movements in the value of the schemes’ assets.

The sensitivity analysis disclosed is intended to provide an indication on the impact on the 
value of the schemes’ liabilities of the risks highlighted.

The ongoing funding position of the schemes are formally assessed on a triennial basis by an 
independent qualified actuary. The results of the valuation are used by the Group and the 
trustees of the schemes to agree a contribution schedule as required. Further details are set 
out in the valuation documentation.

Net debt
Total equity (as defined above)

Debt to capital ratio

2018 
£’000

98,590
129,608

0.76

2017 
£’000

142,247
135,651

1.05

The last completed triennial full actuarial valuation of the schemes was carried out at 
31 March 2016. Deficit repair contributions were agreed at £944,000 per annum from 
1 April 2017, £1,150,000 per annum from 1 April 2018, and £1,400,000 per annum from 
1 April 2019 to November 2025, index-linked, and subject to review at future valuations. 
Additional contributions were agreed towards the costs of running the schemes.

The figures for this financial information have been based, in accordance with IAS 19, 
on valuations using the projected unit method.

114  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

The disclosures are based upon the valuation of the schemes which were carried out as at 
31 March 2016, updated to 25 November 2018 by qualified independent actuaries. The main 
assumptions when valuing the assets and liabilities of the schemes under IAS 19 (revised) are 
as follows:

RPI inflation
CPI inflation
Rate of increase in pensionable salaries
Rate of increase to pensions in payment:
5% LPI
2.5% LPI
Discount rate

Group pension schemes

2018 
%pa

3.20
2.20
n/a

3.10
2.20
2.90

2017 
%pa

3.15
2.15
n/a

3.05
2.15
2.60

None of the Group’s own financial instruments or properties, either held or occupied by the 
Group, are held as assets within either schemes.

Demographic assumptions

Life expectancy of a pensioner 
aged 65 – male
Life expectancy of a pensioner 
aged 65 – female
Life expectancy at age 65 
for someone aged 45 – male
Life expectancy at age 65 
for someone aged 45 – female

Notes to the balance sheet

Fair value of scheme assets
Present value of funded scheme 
obligations

Net pension asset/(liability)

TM Group Pension Scheme

TM Pension Plan

2018 
years

86.9

88.9

88.3

90.5

2017 
years

87.0

88.9

88.5

90.6

2018 
years

87.0

88.9

88.3

90.4

2017 
years

87.2

88.9

88.4

90.5

TM Group Pension Scheme

TM Pension Plan

2018 
£’000

83,313

(69,191)

14,122

2017 
£’000

89,097

(75,488)

13,609

2018 
£’000

46,988

(49,297)

(2,309)

2017 
£’000

48,104

(51,456)

(3,352)

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

On its balance sheet, the Group recognises £14,122,000 surplus in respect of the TM Group 
Pension Scheme. Under IAS 19, the Group as employer is allowed to do this as it has 
unconditional right to any surplus once the last Group benefits have been paid.

Notes to the income statement

Total service cost
Net interest

Total included in ‘staff costs’

TM Group Pension Scheme

TM Pension Plan

2018 
£’000

451
(353)

98

2017 
£’000

290
(319)

(29)

2018 
£’000

749
69

818

TM Group Pension Scheme

TM Pension Plan

Notes to the statement of 
comprehensive income (SCI)

Return on assets excluding amounts 
included in net interest
Losses due to changes in 
demographic assumptions
Gains due to changes in financial 
assumptions
Gains due to plan experience

Total recognised in SCI

2018 
£’000

(1,985)

422

2,461
(580)

318

2017 
£’000

3,910

1,095

(2,415)
(339)

2,251

2018 
£’000

(207)

306

1,763
(1,299)

563

2017 
£’000

284
128

412

2017 
£’000

3,070

268

(1,641)
(909)

788

115

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 27 November 2017 to 25 November 2018

28 Retirement benefit schemes continued

TM Group Pension Scheme

TM Pension Plan

Recognition of defined benefit obligation

Opening defined benefit obligation
Service costs (admin costs)
Past service costs (incl. curtailment)
Interest cost on defined benefit 
obligation
Gains due to changes in  
demographic assumptions
(Gains)/losses due to changes in 
financial assumptions
Losses due to plan experience
Benefits paid including expenses

Closing defined benefit obligation

2018 
£’000

75,489
273
178

2017 
£’000

78,303
290
–

2018 
£’000

51,456
225
524

1,862

2,182

1,324

(422)

(1,095)

(306)

(2,461)
580
(6,308)

69,191

2,415
339
(6,946)

75,488

(1,765)
1,299
(3,460)

49,297

TM Group Pension Scheme

TM Pension Plan

Recognition of defined benefit obligation

Opening fair value of scheme assets
Interest income on scheme assets
Employer contributions
Return on assets excluding amounts 
included in net interest
Benefits paid including expenses

Closing fair value of scheme assets

2018 
£’000

89,098
2,215
293

(1,985)
(6,308)

83,313

2017 
£’000

89,249
2,501
383

3,910
(6,946)

89,097

2018 
£’000

48,104
1,255
1,296

(207)
(3,460)

46,988

2017 
£’000

51,635
284
–

1,438

(268)

1,641
909
(4,183)

51,456

2017 
£’000

46,791
1,310
1,116

3,070
(4,183)

48,104

116  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

The Group expects to contribute £319,000 to the TM Group Pension Scheme and £1,615,000  
to the TM Pension Plan in the period ended 24 November 2019.

The major categories of scheme assets as a percentage of total scheme assets are as follows:

Derivatives (unquoted)
Overseas bonds (quoted)
Government bonds (quoted)
Real estate (quoted)
Cash and cash equivalents (quoted)
Overseas bonds (unquoted)

2018
£’000

(893)
34,583
25,715
4,392
1,671
17,845

83,313

TM Group Pension Scheme

2018 
%

(1) 
42 
31 
5 
2 
21 

100

2017 
£’000

625
38,302
25,655
4,207
1,600
18,710

89,099

2017 
%

1 
42 
29 
5 
2 
21 

100

The major categories of scheme assets as a percentage of total scheme assets are as follows:

Derivatives (unquoted)
Overseas bonds (unquoted)
Government bonds (quoted)
Property (quoted)
Cash and cash equivalents (quoted)
Infrastructure (unquoted)
Overseas bonds (quoted)

2018
£’000

(102)
5,948
10,766
4,392
843
7,941
17,200

46,988

TM Group Pension Plan

2018 
%

– 
13 
23 
9 
2 
17 
36 

100

2017 
£’000

608
6,237
10,510
4,207
1,279
7,698
17,565

48,104

2017 
%

1 
13 
22 
9 
3 
16 
36 

100

The investment strategy of the schemes is driven by their liability profiles. In particular:

•  The weighted average duration of the schemes’ liabilities is 13 years for the TM Group 

Pension Scheme and 15 years for the TM Pension Plan.

•  Approximately 30% of the liabilities of the TM Group Pension Scheme and 40% of the 

liabilities of the TM Pension Plan are in respect of deferred members, with the remaining 
liabilities in respect of pensioner members.

•  Annual benefit payments are expected to peak in 2025 for the TM Group Pension Scheme, 

and in 2030 for the TM Pension Plan.

The assets of the schemes are managed by an independent pension and investment 
consultant. The schemes invest in different types of bonds (including corporate and 
government bonds) in order to align movements in the value of their assets with movements in 
their liabilities arising from changes in market conditions.

Policy for recognising actuarial gains and losses
The Group recognises actuarial gains and losses immediately in the statement of 
comprehensive income.

Sensitivity analysis

TM Group Pension Scheme

TM Pension Plan

Change in assumptions 
compared with 25 November 2018 
and 26 November 2017 actuarial 
assumptions

0.5% decrease in discount rate
1 year increase in member 
life expectation
0.5% decrease in inflation 
(including impact 
of pension increases)

Change in 
actuarial 
value of 
liabilities on 
2018 
£’000

Change in 
actuarial 
value of 
liabilities on 
2017 
£’000

Change in 
actuarial 
value of 
liabilities on 
2018 
£’000

4,637

2,768

5,355

3,020

3,728

1,972

Change in 
actuarial 
value of 
liabilities on 
2017 
£’000

4,071

2,058

2,020

2,351

2,542

2,746

The sensitivities disclosed are calculated using approximate methods taking into account 
the weighted average duration of the schemes’ liabilities (13 years for the TM Group Pension 
Scheme and 15 years for the TM Pension Plan). This is the same approach as in previous years.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

29 Share-based payments
The Group makes equity-settled share awards to Executive Directors and employees under 
two different share option plans, a Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) and a Company Share 
Options Scheme (CSOP). Further details of the plans and amounts recognised in respect of 
these are provided below.

1) Long term incentive plan (LTIP)

Scheme details and movements
The plan provides for annual awards of performance shares to eligible participants. Vesting is 
based on three-year performance. Executive Directors’ vested shares will be subject to 
an additional two-year holding period before being released to participants. Options are 
exercisable at a price of £0.001. The Remuneration Committee has discretion to reduce any 
unvested long term incentive awards (including those in a holding period), or to vary the 
opportunities for future awards, in case of serious financial misstatement or gross misconduct. 
In extreme cases of gross misconduct, the Committee may claw back vested long term 
incentive awards. Participants are eligible to receive cash or shares equal to the value of 
dividends that would have been paid over the vesting period on shares that vest.

Awards will vest on achievement of financial performance measures, measured over a three-
year performance period, to include both earnings per share (EPS) and total shareholder 
return (TSR). EPS will receive a weighting in the LTIP of at least 50%. For all grants to date the 
weightings on EPS and TSR were 70% and 30% respectively. TSR will be measured on a relative 
basis against a relevant peer Group. Other measures may be considered in future years to 
help capture the strategic goals of the business and may be used in conjunction with these 
metrics. Nothing will vest below threshold. 25% of each element will vest for achievement of 
threshold performance under each metric, then increase on a straight-line basis to full vesting 
for achieving stretch performance. The Committee has discretion to adjust the formulaic LTIP 
award downwards (or upwards with shareholder consultation), within the limits of the plan, 
to ensure alignment of pay with the underlying performance of the business.

117

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 27 November 2017 to 25 November 2018

29 Share-based payments continued
The movements in the number of share options during the period were as follows:

Outstanding, start of period
Granted during the period
Forfeited during the period

Outstanding, end of period

2018 
Number

1,988,210
952,929
(631,495)

2,309,644

2017 
Number

1,410,740
778,221
(200,751)

1,988,210

The movements in the weighted average exercise price of share options during the period 
were as follows:

Outstanding, start of period
Granted during the period
Forfeited during the period
Outstanding, end of period

2018 
£’000

1.70
2.02
1.87
1.79

2017 
£’000

1.58
1.86
1.48
1.70

No share options were exercised during the period.

Outstanding share options
Details of share options outstanding at the end of the period are as follows:

Weighted average exercise price (£)
Number of share options outstanding
Expected weighted average remaining life (years)

The contractual weighted average remaining life is 1.26 years.

The exercise price range is £1.70 to £2.02.

2018

1.79
2,309,644
1.26

2017

1.70
1,988,210
1.63

Fair value of options granted
The weighted average fair value per TSR unit (excluding dividends) of options granted during 
the period at measurement date was £1.10.

The following table gives the assumptions applied to the options granted in the respective 
periods shown. No assumption has been made to incorporate the effects of expected early 
exercise. The main inputs are set out in the table below. The dates of grant of the options were 
1 March 2018 and 15 August 2018 (2017: 15 March 2017).

Share price at date of grant (£)
Expected volatility (%)
Vesting period in years
Expected dividends, expressed 
as a dividend yield (%)
Risk-free interest rate (%)
Number of employees subject 
to option grant
Number of shares covered by option

15 August 
2018

1 March 
2018

1.34
39.00
3.00

7.86
0.68

2.30
35.00
3.00

4.43
0.93

2017

1.86
35.00
3.00

5.48
0.06

2016

1.68
33.46
3.00

6.08
0.33

2
277,776

10
675,153

9
778,221

6
803,309

Volatility is a measure of the amount by which a price is expected to fluctuate during 
a period. This is based on an historical analysis of the volatility of McColl’s total return to 
shareholders as measured daily over a historic period commensurate with the remaining 
performance period at date of grant.

Risk-free rate is the yield to maturity on the date of grant on zero-coupon UK government 
bond with a term commensurate with the remaining performance period at date of grant.

McColl’s embedded performance is based on TSR performance banked over the period 
from the start of the averaging period to the date of grant.

Comparators embedded performance is based on the TSR performance banked by each 
LTIP comparator over the period from the start of the averaging period to the date of grant.

118  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Correlation is based on an historical analysis of the average TSR correlation observed across 
the LTIP comparator group as measured fortnightly over a historic period commensurate with 
the remaining performance period at date of grant.

The fair value of services received during the period were the tenure of employment.

IFRS 2 requires that TSR-vesting shares under McColl’s LTIP awards be expensed based 
on fair value, taking into account the probability of achieving the market-based vesting 
condition (relative TSR). The probability of achieving the vesting condition is influenced by the 
performance already delivered between the start of the share price averaging period and 
the date of grant. McColl’s has used a Monte-Carlo simulation model to determine the grant-
date fair value of performance shares for the TSR element of the scheme. Each Monte-Carlo 
iteration calculates the future value of a performance share by projecting forward a future 
TSR scenario for each of its TSR comparators. Valuations are based on the average of 10,000 
iterations of the Monte-Carlo model.

Charge/credit arising from share-based payments
The total charge for the year for equity-settled share-based payments was £29,000 
(2017: £393,000), of which £182,000 related to the reversal of prior year charge.

The carrying value of the liability arising from share-based payments was £422,000 
(2017: £393,000).

2) Company share option scheme (CSOP)

Scheme details and movements
The scheme began operation in August 2015. The scheme meets the criteria of an equity-
settled share-based payment as the entity receives goods or services as consideration for 
its own equity instruments (including shares or share options). Equity-settled share-based 
payments are measured at fair value at the date of grant. The fair value determined at 
the date of grant is expensed on a straight-line basis over the vesting period, based on the 
Group’s estimate of shares that will eventually vest.

For CSOPs granted during the year, performance conditions are 100% TSR based, which 
are consistent with the LTIP performance conditions. For CSOPs granted prior to 2018, 
performance conditions are 100% dependent on reaching EPS growth targets which are 
consistent with LTIP performance conditions. These are detailed in the Remuneration report on 
page 69. EPS is a non-market based vesting condition and therefore fair value is determined 
based upon the probability of achieving the target.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

The movements in the number of CSOP share options during the period were as follows:

Outstanding, start of period
Granted during the period
Forfeited during the period

Outstanding, end of period

2018 
Number

439,335
157,568
(65,325)

531,578

2017 
Number

287,958
176,064
(24,687)

439,335

The movements in the weighted average exercise price of CSOP share options during the 
period were as follows:

Outstanding, start of period
Granted during the period
Forfeited during the period
Outstanding, end of period

2018 
£’000

1.68
2.30
1.68
1.86

2017 
£’000

1.57
1.86
1.62
1.68

No options were exercised during the period.

Outstanding share options
Details of share options outstanding at the end of the period are as follows:

Weighted average exercise price (£)
Number of share options outstanding
Expected weighted average remaining life (years)

The contractual weighted average remaining life is 4.43 years.

The exercise price range is £1.68 to £2.30.

2018

1.86
531,598
4.43

2017

1.68
439,355
1.54

119

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 27 November 2017 to 25 November 2018

29 Share-based payments continued

Fair value of options granted
The weighted average fair value per TSR unit of options granted during the period at 
measurement date was 37.2 pence.

The following table gives the assumptions applied to the options granted in the respective 
periods shown. No assumption has been made to incorporate the effects of expected 
early exercise. The main inputs are set out in the table below. The dates of grant of the 
options were 21 March 2018. CSOP shares issued in previous periods did not have a 
TSR performance measure.

Share price at date of grant (£)
Expected volatility (%)
Vesting period in years
Expected life of option in practice in years
Expected dividends, expressed as a dividend yield (%)
Risk-free interest rate (%)
Number of employees subject to option grant
Number of shares covered by option

21 March 
2018

2.30
35.00
3.00
3.00
4.43
0.93
47
157,568

Volatility is a measure of the amount by which a price is expected to fluctuate during 
a period. This is based on an historical analysis of the volatility of McColl’s total return to 
shareholders as measured daily over a historic period commensurate with the remaining 
performance period at date of grant.

Charge/credit arising from share-based payments
The total charge for the year for CSOP equity-settled share-based payments was £29,000 
(2017: £43,000), of which £43,000 related to the reversal of prior year charge.

The carrying value of the liability arising from share-based payments was £14,000 
(2017: £43,000).

30 Related party transactions
Only the Directors are deemed to be key management personnel. All transactions between 
Directors and the Group are on an arm’s length basis and no period end balances have 
arisen as a result of these transactions.

Salaries and other short-term employee benefits
Share-based payments

2018 
£’000

1,917
29

1,946

2017 
£’000

1,793
228

2,021

There were no material transactions or balances between the Group and its key 
management personnel or members of their close family.

31 Subsequent events
Management have evaluated subsequent events through 19 February 2018, which is the date 
the consolidated financial statements were available to be issued. There were no subsequent 
events that required adjustment to or disclosure in the Group financial statements.

120  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Company balance sheet
for the 52 week period from 26 November 2017 to 25 November 2018

Company statement of changes in equity
for the 52 week period from 26 November 2017 to 25 November 2018

Non-current assets
Investments

Total non-current assets

Current assets
Trade and other receivables

Total current assets and net assets

Total assets

Shareholders’ equity
Equity share capital
Share premium account
Retained earnings1

Note

C4

C5

C6
C6

2018 
£’000

77

77

49,088

 49,088

 49,165

 115
 12,580
 36,470

 49,165

2017 
£’000

77

77

59,367

59,367

59,444

115
12,579
46,750

59,444

1 

Included within retained earnings is profit of £1,583,000 (2017: £3,022,000).

These financial statements of McColl’s Retail Group plc, registered number 08783477,  
were approved and authorised for issue by the Board of Directors on 17 February 2019.

Signed on behalf of the Board of Directors

Robbie Bell
Director

As at 27 November 2017
Shares issued
Profit for the period
Dividends paid

As at 25 November 2018

As at 28 November 2016
Profit for the period
Dividends paid

As at 26 November 2017

Called up 
share 
capital 
£’000

115
–
–
–

115

Called up 
share 
capital 
£’000

115
–
–

115

Share 
premium 
account 
£’000

12,579
1
–
–

12,580

Share 
premium 
account 
£’000

12,579
–
–

12,579

Profit 
and loss 
account 
£’000

46,750
–
1,583
(11,863)

36,470

Profit 
and loss 
account 
£’000

55,476
3,022
(11,748)

46,750

Total 
£’000

59,444
1
1,583
(11,863)

49,165

Total 
£’000

68,170
3,022
(11,748)

59,444

121

Financial statements continued

Notes to the Company financial statements
for the 52 week period ended 25 November 2018

C1. Basis of preparation
The Company’s financial period is the period from 27 November 2017 to 25 November 2018.

The parent company financial statements have been prepared in accordance with Financial 
Reporting Standard 101, ‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’ (FRS 101) and the Companies Act 
2006 (the ‘Act’). FRS 101 sets out a reduced disclosure framework for a ‘qualifying entity’ as 
defined in the standard which addresses the financial reporting requirements and disclosure 
exemptions in the individual financial statements of qualifying entities that otherwise apply 
the recognition, measurement and disclosure requirements of EU-adopted IFRS.

As permitted by FRS 101, the Company has taken advantage of the disclosure exemptions 
available under that standard in relation to business combinations, financial instruments, 
capital management, presentation of comparative information in respect of share capital, 
tangible fixed assets and intangible assets, presentation of a cash flow statement and 
related notes, standards not yet effective, impairment of assets, disclosures in respect 
of the compensation of key management personnel and related party transactions. 
Where required, equivalent disclosures are given in the consolidated financial statements of 
McColl’s plc.

The parent company financial statements are prepared on a going concern basis as set 
out in note 2 of the consolidated financial statements of the Group. The Directors have 
taken advantage of the exemption available under section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 
and not presented an income statement or a statement of comprehensive income for the 
company alone.

A summary of the Company’s significant accounting policies is set out below.

Deferred taxation
Deferred tax is accounted for on the basis of temporary differences arising from differences 
between the tax base and accounting base of assets and liabilities.

Deferred tax is recognised for all temporary differences, except to the extent where a 
deferred tax liability arises from the initial recognition of goodwill or from the initial recognition 
of an asset or a liability in a transaction that is not a business combination and, at the time of 
transaction, affects neither accounting profit nor taxable profit. It is determined using tax rates 
and laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date and 
are expected to apply when the related deferred income tax asset is realised or the deferred 
income tax liability is settled.

Deferred tax assets are recognised only to the extent that the Directors consider that, on the 
basis of all available evidence, it is probable that there will be suitable future taxable profits 
from which the future reversal of the underlying differences can be deducted.

Deferred tax is charged or credited to the income statement, except when it relates to items 
charged or credited directly to equity or other comprehensive income, in which case the 
deferred tax is also dealt with in equity or other comprehensive income respectively.

C3. Staff costs including Directors’ remuneration
The average number of employees (all Executive Directors of the Company) during the 
financial year was three (2017: three).

The Schedule 5 requirements of SI 2008/410 for Executive Directors’ remuneration are included 
within the Remuneration Report on pages 57 to 73.

C2. Significant accounting policies

Investments
Fixed asset investments are shown at cost less provision for impairment.

Taxation

Current taxation
Current tax is provided at amounts expected to be paid using the tax rates and laws that 
have been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. Current tax is 
charged or credited to the income statement, except when it relates to items charged to 
equity or other comprehensive income, in which case the current tax is also dealt with in 
equity or other comprehensive income respectively.

C4. Investments

Shares in subsidiaries

Cost
Investments

25 November 
2018 
£’000

26 November 
2017 
£’000

77

77

The carrying value of the investment in subsidiary undertakings has been reviewed at 
25 November 2018 and no impairment charge is required.

The following information relates to all UK subsidiary undertakings of the Group during 
the period:

All subsidiaries are held by the Company unless stated. All subsidiaries are registered at the 
same address as McColl’s Retail Group plc, except for those registered in Scotland, whose 
registered address is Unit 11, The Avenue, Newton Mearns, Glasgow G77 6AA.

122  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

The following subsidiaries will take advantage of the audit exemption set out within section 479A of the Companies Act 2006 for the year ended 25 November 2018. All the following subsidiaries 
are included on the Group’s consolidated financial statements for the period.

The Group will guarantee the debts and liabilities of the below subsidiaries at the balance sheet date in accordance with section 479C of the Companies Act 2006.

All held by the Company unless stated

Name of company

Bracklands Limited*
Charnwait Management Limited*
Clark Retail Limited*
Dillons Stores Limited*
Forbouys Limited*
Key Food Stores Limited*
Lavells Limited*
Lewis Meeson Limited*
Marshell Group Limited*
Martin McColl Limited*
Martin McColl Retail Group Limited*
Martin Retail Group Limited*
Martin the Newsagent Limited*
NSS Newsagents Retail Limited*
Price Smashers Limited*
RS McColl (UK) Limited*
Smile Holdings Limited*
Smile Property Limited
Smile Stores Limited*
Thistledove Limited
TM Group Holdings Limited
TM Pension Trustees Limited*
TM Vending Limited*
Tog Limited*

*  100% held by a subsidiary undertaking.

Country of registration  
(or incorporation)  
and operation 

England and Wales
England and Wales
Scotland
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
Scotland
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales

Holding

Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares

Proportion of voting rights  
and shares held

100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%

Nature of business 

Property Co 
Retail 
Retailing 
Retailing 
Dormant 
Intermediate Holding Co 
Dormant 
Dormant 
Corporate activities 
Retailing 
Intermediate Holding Co 
Retailing 
Dormant 
Dormant 
Intermediate Holding Co 
Dormant
Intermediate Holding Co 
Dormant 
Retailing 
Intermediate Holding Co 
Predecessor Holding Co 
Dormant 
Corporate Activities 
Intermediate Holding Co 

123

Financial statements continued

Notes to the Company financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 27 November 2017 to 25 November 2018

C5. Trade and other receivables

Amounts owed by Group undertakings

C6. Authorised, issued and fully paid share capital

25 November 
2018 
£’000

26 November 
2017 
£’000

 49,088 

59,367

C7. Dividends paid and proposed
The Board has recommended a final dividend of 0.6 pence per share (2017: 6.9pence), 
totalling £691,000, subject to shareholder approval at the Annual General Meeting to be held 
on 3 April 2019. The final dividend will be paid on 6 June 2019 to those shareholders on the 
register at the close of business on 26 April 2019. The payment of this dividend will not have any 
tax consequences for the Group. The interim dividend, declared and paid, was 3.4 pence per 
share (2017: 3.4p), totalling £3,916,000.

As at 27 November 2017

Issued during the period

As at 25 November 2018

Number 
of shares

115,172,774

741

 115,173,515 

 Share 
capital 
£’000

115

–

115

Share 
premium 
£’000

12,579 

1

 12,580 

The Board has authorised the allotment of shares equal to the nominal value of £77,000.

All issued shares are fully paid.

The Group did not acquire any of its own shares for cancellation in the 52 weeks ending 
25 November 2018 or 52 weeks ending 26 November 2017.

The shares rank equally for voting purposes. On a show of hands each shareholder has one 
vote and on a poll each shareholder have one vote per ordinary share held. Each ordinary 
share ranks equally for any dividend declared. Each ordinary share ranks equally for any 
distributions made on a winding up of the Group. Each ordinary share ranks equally in the 
right to receive a relative proportion of shares in the event of a capitalisation of reserves.

Declared and paid during the year:
Equity dividends on ordinary shares:
Final dividend of 6.9p (2017: 6.8p)
Interim for 2018: 3.4p (2017: 3.4p)

Dividends paid

Proposed for approval by shareholders at the AGM:
Final dividend for 2018: 0.6p (2017: 6.9p)

25 November 
2018 
£’000

26 November 
2017 
£’000

7,947 
3,916 

11,863 

7,832 
3,916 

11,748 

691 

7,947 

The proposed final dividend is subject to approval by shareholders passing a written resolution 
and accordingly has not been included as a liability in these financial statements.

124  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Glossary of terms

Introduction
In the reporting of financial information, the Directors have adopted various Alternative 
Performance Measures (APMs) of financial performance, position or cash flows other than 
those defined or specified under International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS).

These measures are not defined by IFRS and therefore may not be directly comparable with 
other companies’ APMs, including those in the Group’s industry.

APMs should be considered in addition to IFRS measures and are not intended to be a 
substitute for IFRS measurements.

Purpose
The Directors believe that these APMs provide additional useful information on the underlying 
performance and position of McColl’s.

APMs are also used to enhance the comparability of information between reporting periods 
by adjusting for non-recurring or uncontrollable factors which affect IFRS measures, to aid the 
user in understanding McColl’s performance.

Consequently, APMs are used by the Directors and management for performance analysis, 
planning, reporting and incentive-setting purposes and have remained consistent with 
prior year.

The key APMs that the Group has focused on this period are as follows:

Like-for-like sales (LFL): This is a widely used indicator of a retailer’s current trading 
performance and is a measure of growth in sales from stores that have been open for at least 
a year.

Sales from stores that have traded throughout the whole of the current and prior periods, and 
including VAT but excluding sales of fuel, lottery, mobile top-up, gift cards and travel tickets.

Adjusted EBITDA excluding property-related items: This profit measure shows the Group’s 
Earnings Before Interest, Tax, Depreciation and Amortisation adjusted for both property gains 
and losses and other adjusting items.

Property gains and losses: Are incomes and costs that arise from events and transactions 
in relation to the Group’s property and not from the principal activity of the Group, 
i.e. that of an operator of convenience and newsagent stores.

Adjusting items: Relate to costs or incomes that derive from events or transactions that 
fall within the normal activities of the Group but which, individually or, if of a similar type, 
in aggregate, are excluded from the Group’s adjusted profit measures due to their size 
and nature in order to reflect management’s view of the performance of the Group.

Adjusted operating profit: Operating profit before the impact of adjusting items 
as explained above.

Adjusted earnings per share: Earnings per share before the impact of adjusting items.

125

Financial statements continued

Glossary of terms continued

APM

Income statement
Revenue measures

Closest equivalent 
IFRS measure

Note reference 
for reconciliation

Definition and purpose

Sales mix

No direct equivalent

Not applicable

The relative proportion or ratio of products sold compared to the same period in the prior year.

Like-for-like (LFL)

IFRS Revenue

£1,149m
Revenue YE17 
£140m
Add VAT 
Excl. non store rev.  £(160)m
Excl. acq/closures  £(45)m
£1,084m
LFL Sales 2017 
£1,242m
Revenue 2018 
£153m  
Add VAT 
Excl. non store rev.  £(170)m
Excl. acq/closures  £(156)m
£1,069m
LFL Sales 2018 
(1.4)% 
LFL% 

Like-for-like is a measure of growth in Group sales from stores that have been open for at least a year (but 
excludes prior year sales of stores closed during the year). It is a widely used indicator of a retailer’s current 
trading performance and is important when comparing growth between retailers that have different profiles 
of expansion, disposals and closures. It’s reported on an ‘including VAT’ basis, which aligns with the sales 
measurement by the field and stores teams, whose focus is on the retail performance.

Profit measures
Adjusted EBITDA

Operating Profit

Note 6

Basic adjusted earnings 
per share (EPS)

Diluted adjusted earnings 
per share

Balance sheet measures
Net debt

Basic earnings per share

Note 9

Diluted earnings per share

Note 9

Borrowings less cash and 
related hedges

Note 11

This profit measure shows the Group’s Earnings Before Interest, Tax, Depreciation and Amortisation adjusted for 
both property gains and losses and other adjusting items, in order to provide shareholders with a measure of true 
underlying performance of the business.

This relates to profit after tax before adjusting items divided by the basic weighted average number of shares, 
in order to provide shareholders with a measure of true underlying performance of the business.

The difference between basic and diluted metric is the impact of the dilutive effect of share options and 
warrants in existence.

Net debt comprises bank and other borrowings, finance lease payables, and net interest receivables/
payables, offset by cash and cash equivalents and short-term investments. It is a useful measure of the progress 
in generating cash and strengthening of the Group’s balance sheet position and is a measure widely used 
by credit rating agencies.

Other
Capital expenditure (Capex): The additions to property, plant and equipment and 
intangible assets.

Grocery lines: This includes ambient, fresh, frozen and household groceries, and food-to-go, 
but excludes impulse categories (including confectionery, crisps and snacks, soft drinks and 
ice cream), general merchandise, news and magazines, and services.

Quarter: The ‘first quarter’ refers to the 13-week period from 27 November 2017 to 25 February 
2018, ‘second quarter’ refers to the 13-week period from 26 February 2018 to 27 May 2018, 
‘third quarter’ refers to the 13-week period from 28 May 2018 to 26 August 2018 and ‘fourth 
quarter’ refers to the 13-week period from 27 August to 25 November 2018.

126  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2018

Profits/(losses) arising on property-related items: This relates to the Group’s property 
activities including: gains and losses on disposal of property assets, sale and lease back 
of freehold interests; costs resulting from changes in the Group’s store portfolio, including 
pre-opening and post-closure costs; and income/(charges) associated with impairment of 
non-trading property and related onerous contracts. These items are disclosed separately 
to clearly identify the impact of these items versus the other operating expenses related to 
the core retail operations of the business. They can be one-time in nature and can have a 
disproportionate impact on profit between reporting periods.

Contacts, addresses and shareholder information

Contacts  
and addresses

Company registration number
08783477

Head office
McColl’s Retail Group plc 
McColl’s House 
Ashwells Road 
Brentwood 
Essex 
CM15 9ST 
Telephone: 01277 372916 
Email: investor.relations@mccolls.co.uk

ISIN: GB00BJ3VW957

www.mccollsplc.co.uk/investor

Shareholder 
information

Corporate broker
Numis Securities Limited 
The London Stock Exchange Building 
10 Paternoster Square 
London EC4M 7LT

Legal advisors
Travers Smith LLP 
10 Snow Hill 
London EC1A 2AL

Independent auditor
Deloitte LLP 
2 New Street Square 
London EC4A 3BZ

Company Secretary
Rachel Peat 
McColl’s Retail Group plc 
McColl’s House 
Ashwells Road 
Brentwood 
Essex CM15 9ST

Registrar
Equniti Limited 
Aspect House 
Spencer Road  
Lancing 
West Sussex BN99 6DA 

Telephone – UK: 0371 384 2030 
from overseas, call +44 (0) 121 415 7047

Calls outside the United Kingdom will be charged at the 
applicable international rate. Lines open 8.30am to 5.30pm, 
Monday to Friday (excluding public holidays in England 
and Wales)

By email: help.shareview.co.uk

Web portal: www.shareview.co.uk

Designed and produced by Radley Yeldar

www.ry.com

Printed by Pureprint Group using their environmental 
print technology, a guaranteed, low carbon, low waste, 
independently audited process that reduces the 
environmental impact of the printing process. 
Pureprint Group is a CarbonNeutral® company and 
is certified to Environmental Management System, 
ISO 14001 and registered to EMAS, the Eco Management 
and Audit Scheme.

 
McColl’s Retail Group plc 
McColl’s House 
Ashwells Road 
Brentwood 
Essex 
CM15 9ST

T: 01277 372916

www.mccollsplc.co.uk